Pontiac 1998 Trans Sport, Trans Sport 1998 Owner's manual

Pontiac 1998 Trans Sport, Trans Sport 1998 Owner's manual
The 1998 PontiacTrans Sport Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly.
It also explains the “SRS” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explain,s howto start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you howto adjust the ventilation andcomfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about me road and how
to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tellswhat to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire
or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you howto keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you whento perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants
to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you howto contact Pontiac for assistance and howto get service and owner publications.
lt also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-10.
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subjectin this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GM
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name
TRANS SPORT are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10285630 B First Edition
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ceguide enfrangais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
‘Copyright General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Safety ,Warnings andSymbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
These mean there is something that
could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to helpavoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this’’ or “Don’t
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this bookyouwill
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
,not be covered byyourwarranty, and it could becostly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
find these notices:
NOTI'CE:
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in
different words.
These mean there is something thatcould
damage your vehicle.
L
iv
You'll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
c
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbolsyou may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
DOOR LOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
UNLOCK
CAUSTIC
BAlTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
€Xnm
BATTERY
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
Q
e
SEAT
BELTS
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
BRAKE
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
--
FUSE
1 7
LIGHTER
m
HORN
k Y
(@)
SPEAKER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK
OR
FLAME
COULD
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
,\I/,
DAYTIME
RUNNING *
LAMPS " *
FOG LAMPS
0
$0
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN
3
1
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
e,
FUEL
(e)
*
b
e3
V
NOTES
vi
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
Seats and Seat Controls
Rear Seats
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
1-60
1-62
1-64
1-66
1-69
1-80
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat)
Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat)
Children
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
Child Restraints
1-47
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1-97
Larger Children
1-48
1-48
1-56
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Rear Seat Passengers
1-100
1-100
1-101
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-2
1-6
1-33
1-38
1-39
1-39
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, take them out, put them back in and fold and
unfold them,
Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat
To raise the seat, pull up on the lever on the front right
s’ideof the seat. To lower the seat, push the lever down.
Use the lever on the front left sideof the seat to adjustthe
seat forward or rearward. Pull up the lever on the front of
the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat
to where you want it.
To make sure the seatis locked into place, releasethe
lever and try to move the seat with your body.
1-2
You can lose controlof the vehicleif you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or makeyou push a pedalwhen you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle isnot moving.
6-Way Power Seat (Option)
A
Folding Driver’sSeatback
The seatback on the driver’s
seat folds forward to put
items behind the seat. Lift
the lever and fold the
seatback forward. The
seatback will lockinto place
when you push it back to
the upright position.
To adjust the six-way power seat:
Front Control(A): Raise the front of the seat by
holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower
the front of the seat.
Center Control(B): Move the seat forward or rearward
by holding the control to thefront or rear. Raise or lower
the seat by holding the control up or down.
Rear Control (C): Raise the rear of the seat by holding
the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the rear of
the seat.
1-3
Manual Front Passenger Seats
To use, pull up the lever on
the front of the seat to
unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it. To make sure the
seat is locked into place, release the lever and try to
move the seat with your body.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
All front seats recline.
To adjust the seatback,
rotate this knob. It is easier
to recline the seat if you
lean forward, taking your
weight off the seatback.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Evenif you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do
their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its
job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you couldgo into it,
receiving neckor otherinjuries.
The lap belt can’t doits job either. In a crash the
belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones.
But don’t havea seatback reclinedif your vehicle
is moving.
This could causeserious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, havethe seatback upright. Then
sit well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-5
Manual Lumbar Control
Turn the knob on the
inboard side of the
seat toadjust the lower
back support.
when you replace the seats in the vehicle, be sure to
follow the label on the back
of the seat for proper location.
Follow this diagram when the textin this manual tells you
what sets of floor cups to use for each seat.
B
Head Restraints
Slide the headrestraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The headrestraints tilt forward 'and r e w a r d also.
Rear Seats
Seat Controls
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and s'traps
used to adjust, remove and replace the seats. By using
the levers and straps, in the correct order, you can 'easily
remove the seats from your vehicle.
B El
0
I
G
B
Floor Seat Pin Diagram
J
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage
Dump and Stow Feature
If your vehicle has seats in thethird row,there is a
The rear seats in your vehicle, except the captain’s
chairs, can be folded forward.Use this feature for
exiting and entering third row seats.
sleeve on the second row outside safety belt to store the
safety belt while entering and exiting the third row of
the vehicle.
If your vehicle has a bench seat in the second row,
follow this procedure:
Pull the belt out and slide the sleeve along the belt
until it reaches the patch of [email protected] the roof.
Push adjustable head restraints fully down. Fold the
seatback flaton the seat.If the seat adjusts, slide itall the
way back. Releasethe rear set of hooks from the floor
pins; hang onto the straps as the seat folds forward.
Simply press the sleeve against the Velcro patch to
secure it in place.
Do not havethe second row outside safety belt stored if
someone is sitting in the secondrow outside position.
To release the second row outside safety belt, just pull
the sleeve away from the Velcro patch and use the safety
belt as usual. The sleeve should slide freely when not
in use.
There is also a clipon the safety belt used to secure
the belt after it is disconnected from the mini-buckle.
When removing the second row bench seat, secure
the looseend of the safety belt in this clip. This will
keep the safety belt from danglingand possibly
striking something.
Solid Bench Seat
If you have a solid bench seat, the seatbackcan be
folded down. The seat can also be foldedforward or
removed to provide extra storage space.
1-7
Second Row Solid Bench Seats
Folding the Seatback
To fold down the seatback,
pull the nylon strap on the
Removing the Second Row Solid Bench Seat
With the seatback in the upright position,unhook the
side attachment for thesafety belt. This mini-buckle is
located on the right side of the seat.
Push up the red center on
the buckle with a small
pointed object like key
a
or pen.
back of the seat.
To raise the seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of
the seat while raising the seatback until it locks upright,
Push andpull on the seatback to check that it is locked.
1. Pull the nylon strap on the backof the seat to fold
the seatback forward.
/
2. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at
the base of the seat to release the rear latches from
the floor pins.
-
I
I
4. Unhook the front latches by rolling up the gray
handle under the seat until the handle locks.
3. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all
the way forward.
1-9
1. Place the front hooks of
\
\
top toward the rear of
the vehicle and th’enlift
at the front latch release
lever. This should be
done in one motion.
Repla’cingthe Second Row Solid Bench Seat
Don’t put the bench seat in so it faces rearward because
it won’t latch that way.
The solid benches have seat position labels, located on
the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go.
Follow that diagram. Use the A, C and E sets of floor
cups. See “Seat Controls” in the beginning of this
section for more details. The seat must be placed in the
proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
the bench seat onto the
front two floor pins. To
do this, the seat will
need to be angled so that
2. With the seat still folded forward, roll down the gray
handle underneath the seat to lock the front latches.
3. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
4. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins by
pushing down on the rearof the seat.
5. Try to raise thebench seat to check that it is
locked down.
1-11
A seat that isn't locked into place properly can
move around ina collisionor sudden stop, People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.
6. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise
the seatback until it locks upright.
7. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked into place.
If the seatback isn't locked,
it could move forward
in a sudden stopor crash. That could cause injury
to theperson sitting there.Always press rearward
on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
8. Attach the mini-buckle so that the safety belt is
ready for use when a passenger uses the seat.
The buckle reattaches by pushing the latch into the
buckle until the red center pops out again.
1-12
A safety beltthat is twisted or not properly
attached won't providethe protection neededin a
crash. The person wearingthe belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat, always
check to besure that thesafety belts are not
twisted and are properly attached.
~
Third Row Solid Bench Seats
Folding the Seatback
To fold down the seatback, pull thenylon strap on the
back of the seat.
To raise the seatback, pull
the nylon strap while raising
the seatback until it locks
upright. Push and pull on
the seatback to check that it
is locked.
Adjusting the ThirdRow Solid Bench Seat
There are two levers to adjust the seat forward or
rearward. They are below the center position of the
bench, one in front and one inback of the seat.
Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward to allow
for extra storage behind the seat, or slidethe seat back to
allow extra room for third row passengers. Release the
lever. Push and pull on the seat to be sure itis locked
into place.
1-13
Removing the Third Row Solid Bench Seat
I Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold
the seatback forward.
2, Slide the seat all the way back by either lifting the
front adjuster bar and pushing back, or by lifting the
handle on the back of the seat and pulling the seat
toward therear of the vehicle.
4. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all
the way forward.
~~
5. Unhook the front latches by rolling up the gray
handle under the seat until the handle locks.
3. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon straps at
the base of the seat to release the rear latches from
the floor pins.
1-14
6. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly
toward the rear of the
vehicle and then pulling
it out. This should be
done in one motion.
Make sure the seat is in the fullrear position before
beginning this procedure.
1. Place the front hooks
of the bench seat onto
the fronttwo floor pins
in the third row. To do
this, the seat will need to
be angled so that the
front hooks clear the
floor pins.
Replacing the ThirdRow Solid Bench Seat
Don’t put the bench seat in so it faces rearward because
it won’t latch that way. If you want morestorage room
behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.
The solid benches have seat position labels, located on
the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go.
Follow that diagram. Use all of the sets of floor cups in
the third row, G, H, I and J sets of floor cups. See “Seat
Controls” in the beginning of this section for more
details. The seat must be placed in the proper location
for the legs to attach correctly.
1-15
2. With the seat still folded forward, roll down the gray
handle underneath the seat to lockthe front latches.
1-16
3. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in acollision or sudden stop.People
in thevehicle could beinjured. Be sure tolock
the seat into place properly
when installing it.
7. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise
the seatback until it locks upright.
8. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked into place.
4. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check
that the seat isin the full rear position.
5. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins by
pushing down on the rear of the seat.
6 . Try to raise the bench seat to check that it is
locked down.
If the seatback isn’t locked,
it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-17
Split ‘BenchSeats
If you have the split bench seat (50/50 or 40/680), the
seakbacks can be folded down individually and the
sections can be removed individually. The sections can
also be adjusted forward or rearward individually.
The second row (40/60) split bench may be equipped
with built-in child restraint(s). See“Built-In Child
Restraint’’ in the Index.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
To fold downthe seatback on either section of the split
bench seat, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat or
lift up on the lever on the front of the’seatback.
To raise either seatback,
pull the nylon strap on the
back of the seat while
raising the seatback until it
locks upright. Push and pull
on the seatback to check
that it is locked upright.
1-18
-
\
Use the lever on the front of the seatback to raise or
lower the seatback tu the desired position.
Adjusting the Split Bench Seats
/
Lift up either lever and
slide the seat forward to
allow for extra storage
behind the seat, or slide the
seat back to allow extra
room for passengers.
Release thelever. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it
is locked into place.
There are two adjustment levers on each section of the
split bench seats to adjust the seat forward or rearward.
They are located below the center of each section of the
split bench, one in front and one in backof the seat.
1-19
Removing the Split Bench Seat
Make sure the seatback is in the upright position and
that the safety belts are on the correct section of the seat.
The head restraints should be fully down.
For the swmd TOW bench, with the seatback in the
upright position, unhook the side attachment for the
safety belt. This mini-buckle is located on the right side
-
of the seat.
the buckle with a small
pointed object like a key
I-
3. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at
the base of the seat to release the rear latches from
the floor pins.
4. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all
the way forward.
1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap
on the backof the seat to fold the seatback forward.
2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one of
the adjustment bars and sliding the seat fidly rearward.
1-20
-
6. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly
toward the rear of the
vehicle and then pulling
it out.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other section of the
split bench seat.
5. To unlatch the front latches, squeeze the angled latch
release bar toward the straight crossbar.
1-21
Replacing the SplitBench Sections
Don’t put the sections of the bench seat in so they face
rearward because they won’t latch that way. If you want
more storage room behind the seat, adjust each section
by sliding it forward.
The split benches have seat position labels, located on
the back of each seat, showing where the seat must go.
Follow that diagram.
The left (40) section of the 40/60 split bench uses the
A and B sets of floor cups.
The right (60) section of the 40/60 split bench uses
the C and D sets of floor cups.
The left section of the 5
and H sets of floor cups.
0 split bench uses the G
The right section of the 50/50 split bench uses the I
and J sets of floor cups,
See “Seat Controls” in the beginning of this section for
more details. The seat must be placed in the proper
location for the legs toattach correctly.
Make sure the seat is in the fyll rear position before
beginning this procedure.
1-22
~
~~
~
__
~~
1. Squeeze the angled gray bar toward the solid gray
crossbar while placing the fronthooks of the bench
seat onto the front two floor pins.
bench
seat will need to be
angled so that the
front hooks clear the
floor pins.
2. 'lo do this, the
4. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check
that the seat is in the full rear position.
5. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins
by pushing down onthe rear of the seat.
6. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
3. If the front legsare not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
1-23
I
C
CAUTl IN:
A seat that isn’t lockedinto place properly can
move around ina collisionor sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.
7. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap
on the back of the seat and raise the seatback unti
locks upright.
8. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked.
I,,,le seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-24
9. Attach the mini-buckle so that the safety belt is
ready for use when a passenger uses the seat.
The buckle reattaches by pushing the latch into the
buckle until the red center pops out again.
Kepeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other section of the
split bench seat.
A safety beltthat is twisted or not properly
attached won’t providethe protection needed in a
crash. The person wearingthe belt could be
seriously injured. After installingthe seat, always
check to besure that the safety beltsare not
twisted and are properly attached.
Bucket Seats
There are three types of rear bucket seats: RIGHT
ONLY, CENTER OR LEFT and LEFT ONLY.
RIGHT ONLY and LEFT ONLY seats maybe equipped
with the built-in child restraint option.
The rear bucket seats can be removed to provide extra
storage. Each seat that has the built-in child restraint
option fits in only one location in your vehicle, but seats
that don’t havethe built-in child restraint option can be
moved to different rows.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
To fold down the seatback on either section of the split
bench seat, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat or
lift up on the lever on the front of the seatback.
Use the lever on the front of the seatback to raise or
lower the seatback to the desired position.
To raise either seatback,
pull the nylon strap on the
back of the seat while
raising the seatback until it
locks upright. Push and pull
on the seatback to check
that it islocked upright.
1-25
Adjusting the Bucket Seats
Lift up either leverand
slide the seat forward to
allow for extra storage
behind the seat, orslide the
seat back to allow extra
room forpassengers.
Release the lever.Push and pull on the seat to be sure it
is locked into place.
Removing the Bucket Seats
There are two adjustment levers on each seat to adjust
the seat forward or rearward. They are located below the
center, one in front and one in back of the seat.
Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. The
head restraints should be fully down.
1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull thenylon strap
on the back of the seat tofold the seatback forward.
2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one of
the adjuster levers and sliding the seat fully rearward.
1-26
3. From behind the seat, pull the nylon strap at the base
of the seat or liftthe paddle on the side to release the
rear latches from the floorpins.
4. Do not let go of the straps or lever until the seat is
folded all the way forward.
1-27
I 6. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly
toward the rear of the
vehicle and then pulling
it out. This should be
done in onemotion.
5 . To unlatch the front latches, with the seat folded
forward, squeeze the angled.latch rqlease bar toward
the straight crossbar.
1-28
Replacing theBucket Seats
Don’t put the seats in so they face rearward because they
won’t latch that way. If you want more storage room
behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.
The bucket seats have seat position lablels, locatedon the
back of the seat, showing where the seat mustgo. Follow
that diagram. See “Seat Controls” inthe beginning of this
section for more details.The seat must be placedin the
proper location for the legsto attach correctly.
RIGHT ONLY seats that don’t have the built-in child
restraint option fit only in the right location of either
row, the E and F or I and J sets of floor cups.
The CENTER OR LEFT seat fitsin the center location
or in either left location, the A and B, C and D or G
and H sets of floor cups.
To do this, the seat will
need to be angled so that the
front hooks clear the floor
The LEFT ONLY seats that don’t have the built-in child
restraint option fit only in the left location of either row,
the A and B or G and H sets of floor cups.
RIGHT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint
option fit only in the right location of the second row,
the E and F sets of floor cups.
LEFT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint
option fit only in the left location of the second row, the
A and B sets of floor cups.
Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before
beginning this procedure.
1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled graybar
toward the solid gray crossbar while placing the front
hooks of the bench seat onto the front two floor pins.
2. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
1-29
A seat that isn’t lockedinto place properly can
move around in a collisionor sud’denstop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.
6. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull thenylon strap
on the back of the seatand raise the seatback until
it
locks upright.
3. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check
that the seat is in the full rear position,
7 . Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked in place.
4. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins
by pushing down on the rearof the seat.
5, Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
1-30
If the seatback isn’t locked, it cl Id move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Captain’s Chairs
Removing the Captain’s Chairs
The captain’s chairs adjust like the manual front
I
passenger seats.
I
The seatback can be
reclined or raised by turning
the knob on the inboard side
of the seat. It is easier to
raise or lower the seatback
if you lean forward and take
the weight off the seatback.
The arrnrests can be lowered or raised for entering or
exiting the vehicle.
I. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to release the
rear hooks from the floor pins.
1-31
Replacing the Captain'sChairs
The left chair goes in the A and C sets of floor pins.
The right chair goes in the D and F sets of floor pins.
1. Ho'ok the front latches over the front floor pins.
2. The seat can then be lifted off the frontfloor pins
and removed from the vehicle.
2. Push the rear of the seatdown to lock the rear latches
onto the rear setof floor pins.
1-32
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), or air bag system.
I
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is
properly attached.
A seat that isn’tlocked into place properly can
move around in acollision or sudden stop.People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing
it.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously
injured orkilled. In the same crash,
you might
not be if you are buckledup. Always fasten your
safety belt, andcheck that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
PI
It is extrc,,,ely dangerou.s to rid.ein a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision,
people riding in these areas aremore likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not
equipped withseats and safety belts.Be sure
everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that cumes on as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
1-34
You never h o w if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle.Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-35
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-36
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bonestake the forces. That's why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-37
Here AreQuestions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
e.’
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle afteran
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You coucld be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
e.’If
my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in avehicle that has air
bags, you still have tobuckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in sideand other collisions.
1-38
e.’If
I’m a good drwer, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as b’addrivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller
children and babies.If a child will beriding in your
vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want toknow which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-39
4. Push the latchplate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender’’ atthe end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lappart of the belt should beworn low and snugon
the hips, just touching thethighs. In a crash, thisapplies
force to the strong pelvic bones.And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo
over the shoulder andacross the chest. These partsof the
body are best able to tdke belt restraining forces.
5 . To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt,
1-40
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop orcrash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, push down on the button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move
the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing the button down to
make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but
not falling off YOU shoulder.
1-41
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt
if your shoulder beltis
too loose.En a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way,
1-42
@
What’s wrong withthis?
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be
there, not at thepelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Always buckle your beltinto the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-43
&." What's wrong with this?
n
1
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much
too high. Ina crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt forcewould then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that
could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an m e s t .
1-44
@’
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. Ina crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too muchforce to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internalorgans
like your liver or spleen.
At
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-45
e: What's
wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the
belt tospread impact forces'.If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it canwork properly, or ask
your dealer tofix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-46
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and yourvehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lapportion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-47
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetuswon’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as €or anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk sf injury from the forceof an inflating
frontal air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
Right Front Passenger Position
Here are the most important things to know about theair
bag systems:
To learn how to wear the right fi-ont passenger’s
safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlierin this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt except for one thing. If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just letthe belt go back all the way and
start again.
-’-
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
This part explains the fkontal and side impact
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) or air bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a “NextGeneration”
reduced-force frontal air bag for the driver, another
“Next Generation” reduced-force frontal air bagfor the
right front passenger, a side impact air bag for the
driver, and another side impact air bag for the right
front passenger.
IA
CAUTION:
-
severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearingyour safety belt even if you
have air bags, Wearing your safety belt during
a
crash helps reduceyour chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are 6Csupplemental restraints”
to the safety
belts, All air bags even reduced-forceair
bags are designedto work with safety belts
but don%replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
You can
--
!
--
--
Reduced-force frontal air bags for the driver and
right front passenger are designed to work only
in moderate to severecrashes where the front of
your vehicle hits something. They
aren’t designed
to inflate at all in rollover, rear, sideor low-speed
frontal crashes. And,for unrestrained occupants,
reduced-force frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontalcrashes than more forceful
air bags have provided inthe past. The side
impact air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something hits
the side of your vehicle. They aren’t designed
to
inflate in frontal, in rolloveror in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear
a safety
belt properly whether or not there’s an air bag
for thatperson.
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with
great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If
you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could
seriously injure you. This is true even with
reduced-force frontal air bags. Safety belts help
keep youin position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wearyour safety belt,
even with reduced-forcefrontal air bags. The
driver should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on orsleep against
the door.
--
1-49
I
Children who are upagainst, or very close to,an
air b’ag whenit inflates can be seriously
injured
or killed. This is true even though your vehicle
has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protectionfor
adults, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air
bag system is designed
for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Alwayssecure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called Thildren” and
see the caution labels onthe sunvisors and the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
1-50
AI RBAG
United States
Canadian
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows thewords AIRBAG or a deployed
air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfun’ctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem, See“Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The driver’s sideimpact air bag is in theside of the
driver’s seatbackclosest to thedoor.
1-51
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might notinflate properly or it
might for& the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag mustbe kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and donft atta’chor putanything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag coveringand don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
Wh’enshould an airbag inflate?
Tkae cla$ver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags are
designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags aye designed to
inflate only if the impact speedis above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight
into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the theshuld
level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car,the threshold level will be higher.
1-52
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalair bags are
not designed to inflatein rollovers, side impacts, or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air
bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes involving a front door. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle of
the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in
frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
bags, inflation is determined by the location of the
impact and how quickly the side of the vehicle deforms.
What makesan air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.
1-53
What will you see afteran air bag inflates?
After an air baginflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some peoplemay not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag m’odule-- the
steering wheel hub fur the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for theright front passenger’sbag, the
side of the seatbackclosest ta the doolrfor the driver and
right front passenger’s side impact air bags -- will be
hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflatedair bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
prevent the elriver fiom seeing or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does itstop people from leaving thevehicle.
When anair bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problemsfor
people with a historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe todo so.
If you have breathing problems but
canstget out
of the vehicle after anair bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
1-54
In many crashes severeenough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts foryour
bag
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace otherparts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensingand
diagnostic module, which records informationabout
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readinessof the system,when
the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment
Let only qualified technicians workon your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag maynot work
properly. You may haveto replace the air bag
module inthe steering wheel, boththe airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s sideimpact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as
water up to the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, the damage could make the
frontal and side impact air bags inflate and safety belt
pretensioners activate, even if there’s no crash. You
would have to replace the air bags, all the sensors and
related parts, parts of the safety belt system and parts of
the driver and right front passenger’s seatbacks. If your
vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed to water that
soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs by
turning off the vehicle immediately. Don’t let anyone
start the vehicle, even to tow it,unless the battery cables
are first disconnected.
1-55
Servicing YourAir Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Rear Seat Passengers
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the Trans Sport
Service Manual have information about servicing your
vehicle andthe air bag systems. To purchase a service
manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Sndlex.
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those whoare
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat OutsidePassenger Positions
For up to 10 minutes after theignitiun key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflateduring improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air
bag when
it inflates. Avoid wireswrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of
the air bag systems.Be sure to followproper
service procedures,and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualifiedto do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-56
U
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Thenpull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-57
2. Push the latchplate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. To make the lag part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety
Belt Extender” at the endof this section, Make sure
the release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt shouldbe W Q low
~ and snug on
the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.These parts of the
body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.
1-58
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you
would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-59
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides.
This featurewill provide added safety belt cornfort
for
chddren who have outgrown child restmints and for
small
adults. When installedon a shoulder belt, thecomfort
guide pullsthe belt away fiom the neck and head.
If your vehicle has bucket seats in the second row, there
is one guide for each outside passenger position. If your
vehicle has a bench seat in thesecond row, there is one
guide for the left-hand outside passenger position. If
your vehicle has third-row seats, there is one guide for
each outside passenger position. To provide added safety
belt comfort for children who have outgrown child
restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may
be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s howto install a
comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1-60
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the sideof
the seatback.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The
guide must be on top of the belt.
1-61
Center Passenger Position
(Bench Seat)
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat OutsidePassenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide onto the storageclip.
1-62
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a third TOW rear bench seat, someme
can sit inthe centerposition,
When you sit in the center position of the bench seat,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To
make the belt longer,tilt the latch plate and pullit along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-63
Center Passenger Position
(Bucket Seat)
Lap Belt
When you sit in the center position bucket seat, you
have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.
If your vehicle has bucket seats, ssmesne can sit in the
center position bucket seat.
1. Pick up the latch plate and, in a single motion, pull
the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If
the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, let it go
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch
plate to make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-64
The center position bucket seat is a CENTER OR LEFT
type seat. Because it is the only bucket seat with a lap
belt, and has a buckle on only one side, there are certain
places a CENTER OR LEFT type bucket seat should,
and should not, be used. See “Seats” in the Index. If the
CENTER OR LEFT bucket seat is used on the left side
of the vehicle, the person sitting there should use the
lap-shoulder belt. See “Rear Seat Outside Passenger
Positions” in the Index.
4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part
of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
1-65
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and s'ize of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-66
Smaller Children and Babies
Children who are upagainst, or very C ~ L A to, an
air bag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This is true even thoughyour vehicle
has reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protection for
adults, but not for young children and infants,
Neither the vehicle's safetybelt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide, Always secure
children properly in your vehicle,
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whetherit is
the right type and size for your child.A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt might notstay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likelybe over the
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatalinjuries. So, be sure that
Infants need complete support, including support
for the head and neck. This isnecessary because an
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant
in a rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body,the back and shouIders. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an
infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a childor infant restraint.
1-67
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby inan infant restraint.
A
1
I
Never hold ababy in your arms
while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crasha baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-68
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
If your vehicle has this option in a bucket seat, each
bucket seat that has the built-in child restraint fits in
only one location in your vehicle. To find out where a
bucket seat that has abuilt-in child restraint must be
located in your vehicle, see “Removable Rear Bucket
Seats” in the Index. If your vehicle has this option in a
60/40 bench seat, you may have one or two built-in
child restraints. This bench seat will ody fit in the
second row of your vehicle. In both types of seats, the
built-in child restraint worksthe same way.
1-69
This child restraint system conforms to all applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Each child restraint is designed for use only by children
who weigh between 22 and 40 pounds (10 and 18 kg)
and whose height is between 33.5 and 40 inches
(850 and 1 026 km)and who are capable of sitting
upright alone.
The child should also be at least one year old, It is
important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until the
child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives
the infant’s head, neck and body the support they would
need in a crash. See “Child Restraints” later in this
section for more information.
e:
A:
What if the top ofmy child’s shoulders isabolve
the shoulder belt slots for the five-point child
restraint harnesssystem?
A child whose shoulders are above the shoulder
belt slots for the five-point child restraint harness
system shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead,
the child should sit onthe vehicle’s regular seat
cushion and use the vehicle’s adult safety belts.
1-70
BEFORE YOU USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT
BE SURE THETOP OF THE CHILD’S
SHOULDERS ISBELOW THE SLOTS THAT
THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. A CHILD
WHOSE SHOULBERS ARE ABOVE THOSE
SLOTS COULDBE INJURED DURINGA
SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF THE TOPOF
THE CHILD’S SHOULDERSIS ABOVE THE
SLOTS, DON’TUSE THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT WHILE THE VEHICLE IS
IN MOTION.
I
Securing a Child in the Built-In
Child Restraint
1. Raise the head restraint until the lower edge of the
head restraint is even with the top of the seatback.
2. Rotate the head restraint rearward until it touches the
top of the seatback. Make sure there isno gap
between the lower edge of the head restraint and the
top of the seatback.
1-71
3. Lower the child restraint cushion.
1-72
You’ll be usingthe child restraint’s harness (A)
to s’ecureyour child. Don’t use the vehicle’s
safety belts.
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts on a child
seated on the child restraint cushion can cause
serious injury to the child ina sudden stopor
crash. If a childis the propersize for the built-in
child restraint, secure the child using the child
restraint’s harness. But children
who are too
large for the built-in child restraint should sit on
the vehicle’s regular seat anduse the vehicle’s
adult safety belts.
WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE
USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEM
CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE
VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN
STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THE
BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD.
4. Before placing the childin the childrestraint, add
slack to the shoulder harness. Pull the black shoulder
harness release strap firmly. At the same time pull
both shoulder harness straps through the slots in the
seatback as shown.
5. Place thechild on the child restraint cushion.
1-73
6. Select only one side sf the harries's. Place the hamess
over the child’s shoulder.
7. Push the latch plate (B) into the buckle until it clicks.
Be sure the buckk is free of my foreign objects that
may prevent you from securing the latch plates. If
you can’t secure a latch plate, see your Pontiac
dealer for service before using the child restraint.
8. Place the other side of the harness over the
child’s shoulder.
9. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-74
..... .
10. Pull up on both latch plates to make sure they
are secure.
11. Now fasten the left and right halves of the shoulder
harness clip together. The purpose of this clip is
to help keep the harness positioned on the
child's shoulders.
1-75
An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t help
keep the harness in place on the child’s shoulders.
If the harness isn’ton the child’s shoulders,it
won’t be able to restrain the child’s upper body
in a sudden stop or crash. The child could be
seriously injured.Make sure the harness clip is
properly fastened,
12. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap (C)
firmly until the harness is snugly adjusted around
the child. You should not be able to put more than
two fingers between the harness and the child’s
chest. Make sure the harness and buckle strap are
not twisted,
1-76
Removing the Child from the Built-In
Child Restraint
13. Adjust the position of the harness on the child’s
shoulder by moving the clip up or down along the
harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder
part should be centered on the child’s shoulder. The
harness should be away from the child’s face and
neck, but not falling from the child’s shoulders.
1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip.
If you expect that the child will sleep while riding,
you can recline the seatback. See “Seats” in
the Index.
1-77
Storing the Built-In Child Restraint
Always properly store the built-in child restraint before
using the vehicle’s lap-shoulder belt.
2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button on
the buckle.
3. Move one side of the harness off the child’s shoulder.
4. Move the other side of the harness off the
child’s shoulder.
5. Remove the child from the child restraint cushion.
1-78
I. Move both latch plates and both sides of the shoulder
harness clip to the bottom of the harness straps.
2. Fold the child restraint cushion and leg rest up into
the seatback.
3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into
the seatback.
4. Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback, and
secure it by pressing the upper corners against the
fastener strips on the seatback.
1-79
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
v’ehicles,they should have protection provided b y
appropriate restraints.
5. Rotate the head restraint forward and push it all the
way down.
Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle, your
built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked
and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See
“Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat
and Restraint System Parts After a Crash” in the Index.
1-80
Q.’
What are the different types ofadd-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed madefor use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s headrests toward the
center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body canhave the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part
is removable.
1-81
1-82
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to
102 cm) in height, or upto around four years of
age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to
be used either as a rear-facing infant seat or a
forward-facing child seat.
1-83
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be usedin a vehicle, If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or ina
b'ooklet, or both. These restraints use thebelt system in
your vehicle, but thechild also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The ins'tructionsthat come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner's
manual and the chil'drestraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
A booster seat F$G, is
for
who are
about 40 to '60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four to
eight years of age. It's designed to improve the fit of
the vehicle's safety belt system. Booster seats with
shields use lap-only belts; however, booster seats
without shields use lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats
can also help a child to see out the window.
1-84
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here's why:
Top Strap
TION:
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured orkilled if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. This is
because the back of a rear-facing child restraint
would be very closeto the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, besure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. A child restraint with a top strap should only
be used in the second row. If your vehicle has third row
seats, anchor brackets for thesecond row outside
positions are located just above the place where the third
row lap-shoulder belts meet the floor.
1-85
There’s a vinyl ,sleevethere; to get to the bracket, push
this vinyl sleeve aside slightly. You may need to remove
the staple in the sleeve to dothis. Anchor the top strap to
the bracket. If your vehicle does not have third row seats
and belts, or if you need to havean anchor bracket
installed for the center bucket seat in the second row, or
for the right-hand side of a 60/40 bench seat, you can
ask your Pontiac dealer to putit infor you. If you want
to install an anchor bracket yourself, your dealer can tell
you how to do it.
I
1-86
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself.
Securing a Child Restraintin a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’sface or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-87
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-88
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the
retractor while you push down onthe child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing chdd restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-89
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Seat Position (Third Row Bench Seat)
You’ll be using the lapbelt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure
the child in thechild restraint when and as the
instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strapif the child
restraint has one.
1-90
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run thevehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions willshow
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free endwhile you push
down on thechild restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for anadult or larger
child passenger.
1-91
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Seat Position (Bucket Seat)
You’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about
the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-92
2. Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping.
3. While holding it out, run the belt through or around
the child restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, feed it back into the retractor
while you push down on the child restraint. If you're
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-93
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety blelt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or lager child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
A child ina rearfacing child restraint canbe
seriously injured or killed if the front passenger”s
air bag inflates, eventhough your vehicle has
reduced-force frontal air bags. This is because
the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. If your vehicle
is a passenger van, alwayssecure a rearmfacing
child restraint ina rear seat.
If your vehicleis a cargo van, do not use a
reapfacing child restraint inthis vehicle. If a
forward-facing child restraint is suitable for your
child, always movethe passenger seat as far back
as it will go.
~
Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
1-94
~~~
You’ll beusing the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a front passenger air bag,
always move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing aforward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-95
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder beltback into the
retractor while you push downon the child restraint.
You may fmd it helpful to use your kneeto push down
on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.
7 . Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let itgo back all the way, The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-96
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need touse the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-97
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be usedby
only one personat a time,.
~
~~
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s faceor neck?
A:
1-98
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in arear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here a child is
sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but theshoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in’thisway, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force wouldthen be applied right on the
child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lapportion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-99
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, YOU
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a
built-in child restraint, also periodically make surethe
harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head
restraint and anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child
restraint system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt or built-in child restraint system from
doing its job,have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender.It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit.To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn OF frayed, get a new one right away.
If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or
frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces
just liketorn or frayed safety belts can. They may not
protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or
frayed, get a new harness right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not needregular maintenance.)
1400
...
Replacing Restraint System Parts
:era Crash
i r you’ve had a crash, do you need new safetybelts or
built-in child restraint parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
straps were stretched, as they would be if worn during a
more severe crash, then you need newsafety belts or
harness straps.
If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps
are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also
may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in
child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt
or built-in child restraint wasn’t being used at the time
of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
1-101
&
NOTES
1-102
b%
NOTES
1-104
-
v
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-8
2-13
2- 14
2- 15
2-2 1
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-29
2-30
2-34
2-35
2-37
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (Option)
Switchbanks
Sliding Door
Power Sliding Door (Option)
Liftgate
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
ng Out of PARK (P)
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-50
2-52
2-58
2-60
2-64
2-65
2-77
2-78
2-8 1
2-82
2-83
2-99
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locks and Lighting Choices
Windows
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors
Accessory Inflator System (Option)
Power Sunroof (Option)
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC) (ODtion)
2-1
Keys
Leaving young children
in a vehicle with the
ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons,
A child or others could be badly injured
or
even killed.
They could operate power windows other
or
controls or even make th'e vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
The master key can be
used for the ignition as
well as all door locks, the
liftgate lock and the
storage compartments.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number
of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have of
a lot
trouble getting into your vehicle
if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in.So be sure you have an
extra key.
If you need anew key, contact your Pontiac dealer, who
can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the
pre-cat emergency door key which Pontiac sends after
delivery. (This service is not available in Canada.) In an
emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at
1-800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743. (In Canada, call
1-800-268-6800.)
2-3
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers == especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out.
When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open
it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may notbe so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked, Wear safety belts To unlock either front door from the outside with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of
properly, lock yourdoors, and you will be far
the vehicle.
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
You can lock either front door from the outside with
your key by inserting and turning it toward the rear of
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle,
the vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter (if your vehicle has this option).
--
2-4
Power Door Locks
To lock either front door from the inside, push the
locking lever forward.
To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on
the locking lever.
From the inside, press the front of the power door lock
switch (on either front door) to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. If your vehicle is equipped with the Content
Theft-Deterrent system, the power door lock switch will
not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed. See
“Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details.
You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside by
pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either front
door. If your vehicle is equipped with the Content
Theft-Deterrent system, the power door lock switch may
cause the system to arm. See “Content Theft-Deterrent”
in the Index for more details.
2-5
To unlock any door or the liftgate from the outside with
your key, turn thekey to the unlock position and release.
This will onlyunlock that door or the liftgate. You can
unlock all the doors and the liftgate by holding the key
cylinder,in theunlock position for onesecond.
Automatic D’oorLocks
With power do01locks, you can lock all the doors from
the outside by inserting the key and turning the key
cylinder to th’elock position.
You can program the Automatic Door Locks to operate
With powerlocks, when the doors are locked, the inside
as well as the outside door handle cannot open the
doors. This safety feature prevents a door from being
accidentally opened from the inside by moving
the handle.
To override this safety feature, move the locking lever to
the unlock position on the door you want to open.
When the liftgate has been unlocked with the power
door locks, you won’t needthe key to open it. Simply
squeeze the handle above the license plate. This is also
true if you use the optional remote keyless entry
transmitter. See “Keyless Entry System” later in
this section.
2-6
All of the doors will lock automatically when you move
your shift lever out of PARK (P).All doors will unlock
automatically when the ignition is turned off while the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
with the remote keyless entry system and to lockand
unlock automatically to suit your needs. See “Locks and
Lighting Choices” in the Index.
With the Automatic Door Locks feature, you can still
lock or unlock the doors at any time, either manually or
with the power door lock switches.
Last Door Closed Locking
The Last Door Closed Locking feature makes it easier to
use your power door locks to lo’ckall the doors and the
liftgate when leaving your vehicle.
When any door or the liftgate is open, the first time you
attempt to lock the doors using the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped), will
result in three chimes to signal that Last Door Closed
Locking is being used. All doors and the liftgatecan be
opened for five seconds from the time thelast door
is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using
the power door lock switch or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
If the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY, this feature
will not lock the doors.
To turn theLast Door Closed Locking feature off or on,
see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
Sliding Door Delayed Locking
If the sliding door is open when you use your power
door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door is not
locked. Normally the Last Door Closed Locking
feature will be used to lock the sliding door after it has
been closed.
When the ignition is on or if the Last Door Closed
Locking feature has been overridden or programmed to
be off, the Sliding Door Delayed Locking feature will
lock your sliding door for you. Three seconds after the
sliding door is closed, all the doors will lock. If you
have the dual sliding doors, all doors will lock three
seconds after both sliding doors are closed.
Lockout Deterrent
The Lockout Deterrent feature makes it difficult for you
to lock your keys in your vehicle. If the driver’s door is
open while the keys are in the ignition, you will not be
able to use your power door lock to lock the vehicle.
If you don’tleave the keys in the ignition or if you use
the manual door lock, you could still lock your keys in
your vehicle. Always remember to take your keys
with you.
To turn this feature off or on, see “Locks and Lighting
Choices” in the Index.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and
close the door.
2-7
Keyless Entry System(Option)
If your vehicle has this optio'n,you can lock and unlock
your doors and the liftgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your rehicle.
LOCK
a
UN
E
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
2-8
This device c'omplieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by oth'er than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decreasein
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have
to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
Check to determine if battery replacement or
synchronization is necessary. See theinstructions
that follow.
0
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check thelocation. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take afew steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
Remote Driver’s Doorand All Door Unlock
When you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, only the driver’s door will unlock.If you
press UNLOCK again withinfive seconds, all the doors
and the liftgate will unlock. If you would like allthe
doors to unlock thefirst time you press UNLOCK,see
“Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Content
Theft-Deterrent system, the UNLOCK button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter willdisarm the system
(see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for
more details).
Remote All Door Lock
To lock alldoors, press LOCK on the remote keyless
entry transmitter (see “Power Door Locks’’in the Index
for more details on the power door lock features). If
your vehicle is equipped with the Content
Theft-Deterrent system, the LOCK button may arm the
system (see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Indexfor
more details).
2-9
Remote Lock Confirmation
Remote Alarm
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash briefly
to let you know the command has been received. If you
press the LOCK button again, within five seconds, the
horn will sound briefly and the parking lamps will flash
to let you know the vehicle is already locked.
When you press the horn button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, your vehicle’s parking lamps will flash
and the horn will sound. This will allow you to attract
attention, if needed.
If you would like to change the way the parking lamps
and hornoperate with Remote LockConfirmation, see
“Locks’ andLighting Choices” in the Index.
Re111I :-
’ _
__I :’1 Confirmation
When you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicle or to operate the power sliding door
(if equipped), your parking lamps will flash briefly to let
you know the command was received.
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation (Option)
If you have the optional
power sliding door (see
“Power Sliding Door” later
in this section), your remote
transmitter will have a
button that has a van
symbol onit. Press it to
open or close the
sliding door.
If you would like to change the way the parking lamps
operate with Remote Unlock Confirmation, see “Locks
and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
If the sliding door is locked, first unlock all doors (see
“Remote Driver’s Door and All Door Unlock” earlier in
this section), then p r e s the van symbol to open the
sliding door. Press the van symbol again to close the
sliding door.
2-10
You can operate the power sliding door with the remote
transmitter only when the power sliding door override
switch on the overhead console is disabled.
Battery Replacement
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. Whenthe dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry.Static from your body
transferred to these surfacesmay damage
the transmitter.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.
2-11
Replacing the Battery in the
Remote Transmitter
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use the metal flanges to “pop out” the battery.
1. Insert a flat object like a dime into the slot on
the side of the transmitter and twist to separate
the halves.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves are
snapped together tightlyso water will not get in.
5 . Check the transmitter operation. If needed,
follow the instructions on resynchronizing your
remote transmitter.
2-12
Resynchronizing Your Remote Transmitter
Overhead Console Switchbank
Your remote keyless entry system uses a continually
changing code for increased security. Normally,the
receiver in your vehicle will keep track of this
changing code.
0
Loss of synchronization will occur if the transmitter
is activated more than 256 times while out of range
of the vehicle.
Loss of synchronization will occur after the battery
replacement if the transmitter is immediately
activated more than 16 times while out of range of
the vehicle.
If your remote keyless entry transmitter has stopped
working, you may need to resynchronizethe transmitter to
the vehicle receiver.To do this, press the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons together and hold for at least seven
seconds or until the hornsounds if equipped with Content
Theft-Deterrent. Check the transmitter operation.
This switchbank is located in the overhead console. The
switches that you may find in this switchbank are the
Interior Lamps Override, Power Sliding Door Override,
Power Sliding Door, Power Rear Quarter Windows and
Sunroof. If your vehicle does not have some of the
options controlled by these switches, there will be a
blank button in its place.
Switchbanks
For more information, please see each of these features
in the Index.
There are two sets of switchbanks located in the front of
the vehicle. The switches will vary with the options that
are on your vehicle. It is useful to become familiar with
them since they are used frequently while operating
the vehicle.
2-13
Instrument Panel Switchbank
Sliding Door
To open the sliding do’orfrom outside the vehicle, pull
the handle out and then pull the door toward the rear. If
you slide the door all the way back, the door will rest in
a detent position.The doormust overcome this detent
when closing.
To move the door forward, you must first pull the door
past the open detent position.
This switchbank is h a t e d in the instrument panel below
the comfort controls.The switches and controls that you
may find in this switchbank are the Rear Fan Knob,
Rear WindowWiperNasher, Fog Lamps and Traction
Control. If your vehicle does not have some of the
options controlled by these switches, there will be a
blank buttonin its place.
For moreinformation, please see each of these features
in the Index.
If your vehicleis not equipped with the optional rear
climate control system, there will be a storage space in
this switchbank. The rubber mat can be removed for
cleaning. Snap the mat into place after cleaning.
2-14
If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep grade
(15 percent or more), the door may not stay open
and could slam shut, possibly injuring someone.To
make sure the door doesnot slam shut, be sure to
hold it open until everyone
is clear of the door, and
only then allow it to slowly close.
Does your vehicle have a sliding door on thedriver’s
side? If it does, this door is designed to open only a little
if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, don’t try to
force the sliding door.Just close the driver’s side sliding
door. Then when the fuel filler door is closed, the
driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally.
Sliding Door Lock
Power Sliding Door (Option)
With this option, you can open and close the sliding
door with the switches inside your vehicle. If you have
the optional remote keyless entry system, you can also
operate the power sliding door with your remote
transmitter. See “Keyless Entry System” in the Index.
Leaving young childrenor pets unattended in
your vehicle can be dangerous. They could
operate the power sliding
door. A child or others
could be injured.Do not leavechildren or pets
Lock the sliding door from inside the vehicle by moving
the manual locking lever down. Unlock it by moving the
lever up.
I unattended in your vehicle.
With the power door locks, the sliding door lock has a
delay feature. See “Power Door Locks” or “Locks and
Lighting Choices” in the Index.
2-15
To operate thepower sliding
II
II
/I
II I
door, the power sliding door
override switch must be
disabled. This switch is
located in the overhead
console switchbank.
~~
NOTICE:
~
When your vehicle goes through an automatic
car wash, be sure the power sliding
door override
feature is enabled. Ifit isn’t, the power sliding
door may open accidentally.
I
Pushing the bottomof the button will disable the power
sliding door; it will not operate when either of the power
door switches or the power sliding dolor button on the
remote transmitter is pressed.
The power sliding door override switch will also stop
the door immediately, while the door is opening or
closing, when the override featureis enabled.
To open or close the sliding door, press and release one
of the two power door switches.
2-16
One is mounted on the wall, just infront of the
passenger’s side sliding door. The other switch is
located in theoverhead console switchbank.
The sliding door must be unlocked for it to operate. The
key does not have to be inthe ignition. To help avoid
accidental operation of the sliding door, disable the
power sliding door by pushing the power slidingdoor
override switch.
When the keyis in the ignition inRUN, the power
sliding door will only openif the transaxle is in
PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to be in
PARK (P) to close the door.
If the override feature is not enabled and the power
sliding door is open or in the process of closing when
you shift out of PARK(P), a buzzer will sound.This is a
warning that the sliding door is not completely closed.
r
If you shift the transaxle out
of PARK (P) and
accelerate before the power sliding door latches
closed, the door may reverse to the open position.
A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and
be injured. Always make sure the power sliding
door is closed and latched before you drive away.
2-
You or others could be injured if caught
in the
path of the slidingdoor. Make sure the door path
is clear before closing the door.
If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is
closing, the door will automatically reverse to the open
position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing
door, or stronger. The force of the closing door increases
significantly as the door approaches the latched position.
2-18
To manually open the power sliding door when the
power sliding door override feature is disabled, pull the
inside or outside handle and let go. The door will
open fully.
To manually open the power sliding door when the
power sliding door override feature is enabled, pull the
inside 'or outside handle and slide the door all the
way back.
Resetting the Power Sliding Door
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not at
all because of the following conditions:
If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly injuring
someone. To make sure the door does not slam
shut, turnon the power sliding door feature.
Then if thedoor closes,it will close under the
control of the power door system.
To manually close the power sliding door when the
override feature is disabled, pull the inside or outside
handle or the edge of the door. Move the door about
4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position and release.
The door will close completely and latch for you.
To manually close thepower sliding door when the
override feature is enabled, pull the inside or outside
handle and slide the door all the way forward to the
latched position.
A low voltage or dead battery,
Disconnecting the battery or
If the IGN 1, B/U LAMP, RADIO or PWR
SEATPSD fuse is removed or blown.
See “Fuse Panel” in the Index for more information
about your fuse panel.
If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door
will need to be reset. To do this, follow the directions
listed here. It will be easier if you read through them
once before beginning this procedure.
1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked
and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. Enable the power sliding door override feature.
4. Remove the RADIO fuse from the underhood fuse
and relay center. Leave it out for30 seconds.
5. Reinstall the fuse and wait 10 seconds.
2-19
6. Disable thepower sliding door override feature.
7. Push either of the power door buttons to open the
power sliding door.
8. Wait five seconds and close thedoor by pushing
either power door button.
9. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps 7 md 8.
If the door does not rest inthe fully open position after
repeating Step 7, repeat Steps7 and 8 again. If the door
still does not operate correctly, see your dealer
for service.
The security lock lever is locatedon the insideof the
sliding door, on the frontedge of the door. To access the
lever, open the slidingdoor. Use the security lock label
on the edge of the dooras a guide.
To use thesecurity lock,
move thesecurity lock lever
all the way up and close the
door from the outside.
Sliding Door Security Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with a sliding door security
lock that helps prevent young children or other
passengers fiom opening the sliding doorby using the
inside door handle. This lock ison both doors if your
vehicle has the dualsliding doors.
If you have the optional power sliding door, you can
override the security lock by pressing eitherpower door
switch whenthe power slidingdoor override feature is
disabled. See “Power Sliding Door” earlier in
the section.
2-20
If you have the optional power sliding door, disable the
power sliding door by pushing the override switch on
the overhead console. The pow’ersliding door cannotbe
opened from the insidewhen this feature is inuse.
If you want to open the sliding door when the security
lock ison, unlock the slidingdoor and open thedoor
from the outside.
If you have the optional power sliding door, disable the
power sliding door override feature. Press either power
door switch.
You should let adults and older children know how the
security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If you
don’t, adults or older children who ride in the rear won’t
be able to open the sliding door from the inside when
the security lock feature is inuse.
NOTICE:
Be sure there are no overhead obstructions, such
as a garagedoor, before you open the liftgate.
You could slam the liftgate into something
and
break the glass.
Canceling the Sliding Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from
the outside.
2. Move the security lock lever all the way down.
The sliding door lock will now work normally.
Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in
the cylinder to the right. To lock the liftgate using the
key, turn the key to the left.
Open the liftgate using the handle above the license
plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise by
itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come on,
illuminating the rear cargo area (see “Interior Lamps” in
the Index).
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate
open, even slightly. See “Engine Exhaust’’ in the Index.
2-21
A light on your instrument panel will warn you ifthe
liftgate is not completely closed (see “Door Ajar
Warning Light” in the Index).
It can bedangerous to drive with the liftgate
open becausecarbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal betweenthe bsdy and
the liftgate:
Make sure all windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with
the setting
on bi-level (outsideair button is pressed),
That will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Comfort Contruls” inthe Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust’’in the Index.
2-22
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities.
Although your vehicle has a? number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are waysyou
can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you p a k your Pontiac and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this,
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition and transaxle. And remember to lockthe doors.
Parking at Night
Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
If your vehicle has this option, it has a theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park ina lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’sbest to lock itup and take your key.
But what if you have to leave your key? What if you
have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
A light located on top of your instrument panel (near the
center of the vehicle, next to the windshield) will flash
slowly to let you know that the system has been armed.
While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power
lock switch.
2-23
Once armed, the alarm will go off if sornewne tries to
enter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key), breaks a window, tries to damage
the vehicle or turns the ignition on. The horn will sound
and yourvehicle’s parking lamps will flash for up to two
minutes. The system will also cut off the fuel supply,
preventing the vehicle from being driven.
Arming with the R
Entry Transmitter
~
~
ce Keyless
When the alarm is armed, the liftgate may be opened
with the remote keyless entry transmitter or with a key.
Your alarm system will arrn when you use yourremote
keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is
not in the ignition. The security light will turn on to let
you know the system is M a g , After all doorsand the
liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing at a very slow rate to letyou know the
system is armed.
Arming with thePower Lock Switch
Arming with Your Key
Your alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lockthe doors while m y door or the
liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition
(if you would like to turn off power lock switch arming,
see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index).
Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to
know the system is armini. After all doors and the
The security light flashes quickly to let you know when
the system is ready to arm with the power door lock
switches. The security light will stop flashing and stay
on, when you press the rear sf the power lock switch, to
let you know the system is arming. After all doors and
the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing at a very slow rate to letyou know the
system is armed.
Arming Confirmation
2-24
lock the doors. The security light will turn on to let you
liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the
system is armed. If you would like your key not to arm
the system, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in
the Index.
If remote unlock confirmation is on (see “Locks and
Lighting Choices” in the Index), your parking lamps
will flash briefly to letyou know when your alarm
system has armed.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
The security light will stop flashing to let you know the
system is no longer armed.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing
to let you know the system is no longer armed. If you
would like your key not to disarm the alarm system, see
“Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
Nuisance Alarms
If you experience nuisance alarms (alarms which are not
caused by the opening of a door or the liftgate and are
not desirable), you may need to reduce the damage
detection sensitivity. Try programming the Content
Theft-Deterrent to Mode 1.
If you continue to experience nuisance alarms, you may
want to try turning off damage detection by
programming your Content Theft-Deterrent to Mode 2.
If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms, you
can turn off the Content Theft-Deterrent system by
programming your Content Theft-Deterrent to Mode 3.
See “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index for more
information. See your dealer or qualified technician
for service.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for thefirst
200 miles (322km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get newbrake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
--
--
2-25
OFF (C): This position unlocks the steeringwheel,
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the
switch to five positions.
c
ignition and transaxle, but does not send electrical
power to any accessories. Use this pmition if your
vehicle must be pushe'd or towed, but never try to
push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will soundif
you open the driver's doorwhen the ignition isoff and
the key is inthe ignition.
RUN (D): This is an on position towhich the switch
returns after you start your engineand release the
switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine is
running. But even when the engine is not running, you
can useRUN to operate your electrical power
accessories, and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
A
ACCESSORY (A): This is an on position in which you
can operate your electrical p'ower accessories. Press in
the ignition switch as you turn the top of it toward you,
LUCK (B): This isthe only position in which you can
remove the key. This locks yaw s t e g ~ i gwheel, ignition
and transaxle.
.- i .i;
1
.
2-26
,
START (E): This position starts the engine.When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch will
return to RUN for normal driving,
Note that even if the engineis not running, the positions
ACCESSORY and RUN are positions that allow you to
operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
I
If yourkey seems stuck in
LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sureyou are using the correctkey; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)
if yoptlp Pontiac IS
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle isstopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour
engine gets warm.
I
Starting Your Engine
~~~
NOTICE:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
I
Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a timewill cause your batteryto be
drained muchsooner. And theexcessive heat can
damage your startermotor.
2-27
2, If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in three seconds (or starts
but then stops), push the accelerator pedal about
one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds, or
until it starts.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try this:
Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down.
Then push your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor. Hold it there. Then hold the key in START.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator
pedal. If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another
15 seconds and repeat this step.
2-28
NOTICE:
~~
Your engine is designed towork with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
pasts OF accessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, checkwith your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If yo’uever have to haveyour vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual that tells
how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped)
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Plugging the cord into
an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet.If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated
for
at least 15amps.
In very cold weather, 0 OF (- 18 C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
O
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from
moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, weask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-29
Automatic Transaxle Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
BARK (PI as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section.
PRND321
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. As you step on the
brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click
from the solenoid of the BTSI. This ensures that the
BTSI is operating properly.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the
shift lever is not fully
in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to.PARK(P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (a)”in the Index. If
you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up,
2-30
NOTICE:
I
Shifting toREVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift toREVERSE (R) only after yourvehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to getout of snow,
ice or sandwithout damaging your transaxle, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
~~
I
Shifting outof PARK (E’)or NEUTRAL (N)while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly
on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople o r
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N)
. , while .your engineis racing.
..v
NEUTRAL (N):In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also,use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-31
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is
€or normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
*
Going about 35 mph (55 k
rn/h)
or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (€3).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting
between gears).
I)
When going down a steep hill.
2-32
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and ow.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your tramaxle. Use
THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE @) as
much as possible. Don’t shift into SECUND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105
b d h ) or you em damage your engine.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seemsto start up rather slowly, or
if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster,
something may be wrong withtransaxle
a
system
sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your
vehicle canbe damaged. So, if this happens, have
your vehicle servicedright away. Until then, you
can use SECOND (2) when youare driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for
higher speeds.
If your front wheels can’trotate, don’t try to
drive. This mighthappen if you were stuck in
very deepsand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with onlythe accelerator
pedal. This couldoverheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes orshift into PARK (P)
to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t
downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slow enough.
2-33
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold theregular brake
..
I
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake pedal
down withyour right foot
and push downthe parking
brake pedal with your
left foot.
pedal down with your right foot whileyou push down
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
(To
release thetension on the parking brake cable, you will
need to apply about the sameamount of pressure to the
parking brake pedala:s youdid when you set theparking
brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking
brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position.
NOTICE:
If the ignition is on, the brake system
warning light will
‘comeon. See “Brake System Warning Light” in
the Index.
Driving with the parking brake
on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
I
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section
shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from
moving.
2-34
I
Shifting Into PARK (P)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if
PARK (P) with the
the shift lever is not fully in
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can
move suddenly.You or others could be injured.
To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, evenwhen
you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot
Pull the lever toward you.
2-35
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
1
suddenly if the shift leveris not fullyin PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set, And, if you
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
0
Move the lever up as far as it will ,go.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-36
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unlessyou have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehi~leis in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Them, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (I?)without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (PI.
Torque Lock
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
If you are parkmg ona hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the
Your vehicle has Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P), when the ignition
is in RUN.
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take someof the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you
may hear a click from the solenoid of the BTSI.This
ensures that the BTSI is operating properly. See
“Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the wayinto
PARK (P) asyou maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you
ever
hold the brake pedal down butstill can’t shift out of
PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold thebrake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-37
c
Parking Over Things That Burn
I
=-----
1
Things that canburn could touch hot exhaust
parts underyour vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers,leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
ne Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(GO),which you can’t seeor
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
0 Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road
or over
road debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out anyCO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
~~
2-38
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better notto park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
I t can be dangerous to
get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fullyPARK
in
(P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unlessyou have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Idling the enginewith the air system control off
could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle
(see the earlier Caution under
‘!Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling ina closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide(CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
CO can come ineasily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer” in
the
Index.
Another closed-in place can be
a blizzard. (See
L4Blizzard” in the
Index.)
--
--
2-39
Locks and Lighting Choices
Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can
program depend on the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be
programmed. To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with, follow the steps listed for entering the
programming mode.
~~
Number
of Chimes
Sounded
Delayed
Illurnmatican/
Exit
Lighting
~~
Automatic Last Door
Door Locks Closed
Locking/
Lockout
Deterrent
X
X
X
2-40
Fer
1
J re
Remote
Driver’s
Remote
Lock/
Unlock
Confirma tion
Door
Unlock
Control
X
x
I
Content
Theft
Content
Theft
Arming/
Disarming
I
X
Entering Programming Mode
Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting
To program features, your vehicle must be in the
programming mode. Follow these steps:
With Delayed Illumination, the interior lamps will stay
on for about 25 seconds after all the doors and the
liftgate are closed.
1. The Content Theft-Deterrent system (if equipped)
must be disarmed. See “Content Theft-Deterrent
System” in this section.
2. Remove the BCM PRGRM fuse from the instrument
panel fuse block, located to the right of the glove
box. (See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.)
3. Close the driver’s door.
4. Turn the ignition switch towards you to
ACCESSORY.
5. Count the number of chimes you hear. You will hear
two to four chimes depending on the features your
vehicle is equipped with. Refer to the chart
shown previously.
You can now program your choices.
To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed
under “Exiting Programming Mode” later in
this section.
With Exiting Lighting, the interior lamps will come on
and stay on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove
the key from theignition.
To customize these features to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can beprogrammed to one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (The interiorlamps will turn on
or off at the same instant that a door
is opened or closed.)
Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps
will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors and
liftgate are closed, or until you lock the doors.)
Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will
come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition
and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until you lock
the doors.)
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines Modes 2
and 3.)
2-41
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 4.
Programmable Modes
To change themode:
Your vehicle can be programmed to oneof the
following modes.
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programing
Mode” listed previously.
2. Turn the interior lamps dial all the wayto the right
and thenback slightly to the left.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is in.
You can change the mode by turning the interior
lamps dial allthe way to the right and thenback
slightly to the left.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is nowset. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Automatic Door Locks
With Automatic Door Locks, all doors will
automatically lock when you shift out of PARK (P) and
automatically unlock whenthe ignition is turned to OFF.
To customize these features to your preference, I I 2
“Programmable Modes” following.
2-42
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Automatic door
locking and unlockingis disabled. You will always need
to lock your doors manually before driving to increase
occupant safety.)
Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only
0 The automatic door unlock feature is turned off.
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed;all doors will lock automatically.
Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off
Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P);
all doors will unlock automatically.
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on andthe
driver’s door closed;all doors will lock automatically.
Mode 4: Automatic Unloclung with Transaxle in
PARK (P)
0
Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors
will unlock automatically.
0
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed;all doors will lock automatically.
Last Door Closed Locking and
Lockout Prevention
With the Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout
Prevention features, your vehicle will do the following:
If you leave your key in the ignition and leave the
driver’s door open, you won’t be able to lock the
doors using the power door lock switch.
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is in.
You can change the mode by pressing LOCK again,
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is n’owset. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
0
When you press LOCK on the power door lock
switch or remote keyless entry transmitter (if
equipped) while any door or the liftgate is open, the
doors will not lock. Instead you will hear three
chimes which let you know that the Last Door
Closed Locking feature is inoperation. Five seconds
after all the doors and the liftgate are closed, all the
doors and the liftgate will automatically lock.
To customize these features to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Doors will always lock
immediately when you press LOCK on the the power
door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped.)
Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (If you leave your key
in the ignition with the driver’s door open, you won’t be
able to lock the doors with the power door locks).
Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter (if
equipped) is used to lock the vehicle while any door or
the liftgate is open, you will hear three chimes. The
doors will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all doors and liftgate will lock.)
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines Modes 2
and 3,)
Vehicles are ‘deliveredprogrammed in Mode 4.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press UNLOCK on the power door lock switch,
2-44
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The
number of chimes tells you which mode your
vehicle is in. You can change the mode by pressing
UNLOCK again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can eitherexit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Remote Driver’sUnlock Control
With the Remote Driver’s Unlock Control feature, you
can program your vehicle to do the following:
When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless
entry transmitter, the driver’s door will unlock and,
When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless
entry transmitter again within five seconds, all doors
and the liftgate will unlock.
To customize this feature to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press
UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter, all
doors and theliftgate will unlock.)
Mode 2: Remote Driver’s DoorUnlock Only (When
you press UNLOCKon your remote keyless entry
transmitter once, the driver’s door will unlock.
When
you press UNLOCK onyour remote keyless entry
transmitter again, withinfive seconds, all doors and the
liftgate will unlock.)
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by followingthe instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation
With theRemote Lock and Unlock Confirmation
feature, your vehicle can do the following:
0
Vehicles are delivered programmedin Mode2.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The
number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is in. You can change the mode by pressing
UNLOCK again.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitterto
lock your vehicle,your parking lamps willflash
briefly to let you know the command has been
received. If you press LOCK on the remote keyless
entry transmitter again,the horn will sound briefly
and the parking lamps will flash briefly to let you
know your vehicle islocked and,
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicle or operate your power sliding
door (if equipped),your parking lamps will
flash briefly.
To customize these features to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
0
2-45
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock
confirmation are disabled.)
Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle,your parking lamps will flash briefly
to let you know the command has been received.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicleor operate your power sliding door
(if equipped), your parking lamps will flash brieflyto
let you know the commandhas been received.
Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle, the horn will sound briefly and
your parking lamps will flash briefly to let youknow
the command has been received.
a When you usethe remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicle or operateyour power sliding door
(if equipped), your parlung lamps will flash briefly to
let you know the command has been received.
2-46
Mode 4: Exterior amps Flash and Horn Sound (on
Second LOCK Press)
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle, your puking lamps will flash
briefly to letyou know the command has been
received. The horn will sound briefly and your
parking lamps will flash briefly if you press the
LOCK button again within five seconds.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicleor operate your power sliding door
(if equipped), y o u parking lamps will flash briefly to
let you know the command has been received.
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 4.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode9’listed previously.
2. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is in.
You can change the mode by pressing the LOCK
button again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or progr’amthe next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 3: Feature Off (Your Content Theft-Deterrent
system is always disarmed.)
Mode 4: Damage Detection withNorrnal Sensitivity (If
anyone damages or enters your vehicle while your Content
Theft-Deterrent system is armed,an alarm will sound and
your parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
Content Theft-Deterrent System
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode4.
With the Content Theft-Deterrent System, if anyone
damages or enters your vehicle while the system is
armed, an alarm will sound and your parking lamps will
flash for two minutes.
To customize this feature to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
To change the mode:
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can beprogrammed to one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity
(If anyone seriously damages your vehicle or opens a
door or the liftgate while your Content Theft-Deterrent
system is arrned, an alarm will sound and your parking
lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
Mode 2: Damage Detection Off (If anyone opens a door
or the liftgate while your Content Theft-Deterrent
system is armed, an alarm will sound and your parking
lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Turn the parking lamps on, then off.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is in.
You can change the mode by turning the parking
lamps on, then off again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on yourvehicle.
2-47
Arming and Disarming the Content
Programmable Modes
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle can be programmed to oneof the
following modes.
To arm and disarm the Content Theft-Deterrent system,
the system must be turned on by using Modes 1 , 2 or 4
listed previously in this section under “Content
Theft-Deterrent System.”
With the Arming and Disarming feature, you can
program the vehicle to dothe following:
Arm the system when you lock the doors using either
power door lockswitch while any door or the liftgate
is open andthe key is removed from the ignition.
Arm the system when you lock the doors with your
key or remote keyless entry transmitter and the key
is removed from the ignition.
Disarm the system when you unlock the doors with
your key orremote keyless entry transmitter.
To customize this feature to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
2-48
Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off
The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your key or remote keyless entry transmitter. The
key must be removed from the ignition when you
lock the doors or the Content Theft-Deterrent system
will not arm.
The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your keyor remote keyless entry transmitter.
Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Arm/Disarm Only
The system will arm whenyou lock the doors with
your remote keylessentry transmitter. The key must
be removed from the ignition when youlock the
doors or the Content Theft-Deterrent system will
not arm.
0 The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your remote keyless entry transmitter.
NOTE: While this mode provides increased security, it
can be a problemif your remote keyless entry
transmitter is damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for
any reasonwhile the Content Theft-Deterrent system is
armed. The Content Theft-Deterrent system must be
disarmed for the engine to run while in Mode 2; your
key can no longer disarm the system.
Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming
The system will arm when you lock the doors using
either power door lock switch while any door orthe
liftgate is open and thekey is removed from
the ignition.
2. Insert your second key fully into any door key
cylinder and turn it to the unlock position.
This step is inconvenient, but necessary to prevent
accidental programming of this feature to Mode2.
Do not program this feature to Mode 2 without first
reading the specialnote contained in the description
for that mode. The door key cylinder must remain in
the unlock positionduring Steps 2 through 4.
3. Press the horn symbol on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your key or remote keyless entry transmitter and the
key is removed from the ignition.
4. Count the number ofchimes you hear. The
number of chimes tells you which mode your
vehicle
is in.You can change the mode by pressing the
horn symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter again.
The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
5. Repeat Step 3 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the modeyou want.
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 1.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
6. Remove your key from the door key cylinder.
The mode you selected isnow set. You can either exit
the programming mode byfollowing the instructions
later in this sectionor program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-49
Exiting Programming Mode
Power Windows (Option)
To exit programming mode, just turn the key from
ACCESSORY to OFF and put the BCM PRGRM fuse
back into the instrument panel fuse block.
NOTE: After programming a feature, you can exit the
programming mode at anytime.
Windows
Manual Windows
Use the manual crank to open and close the
front windows.
If you have power windows, the switches on the driver’s
door m e s t control the front windows (when the
ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY). The left switch
eontrols the driver’s window. The right switch controls
the passenger’s window.
The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. Push the switch to the first position to lower
the window normally.
2-50
To activate the auto-down feature, push the switch all
the way down, then release. The window will lower
completely. To stop the window from lowering all the
way, pull up the front of the switch.
Power Rear Quarter Windows
f
-3
c overhead console
C
C
To raise the window, pull up the front of the switch.
Side Window Latches
switchbank, is used for
opening and closing the rear
quarter windows.
The rear of the side windows swings open.
To open, pull the latch
forward to release it, then
swing the window outward.
Press the center of the latch
to secure the window in the
open position.
Press the top ribbed side of the button to open the
windows; both windows will open. The windows can be
opened fully or only a portion depending on how long
the button is pushed.
Press the bottom of the button to close both windows.
Horn
To close, pull the center of the latch forward and then
close the latch. Press the center of the latch to secure the
window in the closed position.
YOUcan sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols on
your steering wheel.
2-51
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you exit
and enterthe vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering
wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlamp H i g m o w Beam Changer
Windshield Wiper and Washer Control
Cruise Control (Option)
2-52
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiringfor
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a
normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned out.
Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to
make sure they are working.
To signal a turn, move the leverall the way up or down.
When theturn is finished, the lever will return automatically.Turn Signal On Chime
If either turn signal is left on for more than 314 mile
An arrow on the instrument
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to
panel will flash in the
turn it off.
direction of the turn or
If you need to leave the signal on for more than 3/4 mile
lane change.
(1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it back on.
Headlamp HigWLow Beam Changer
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
To change the headlamps from high to low beam, or low
to high, simply pull the turn signal lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument cluster will also
be on.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
2-53
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
You control thewindshield wipers by turning the band
To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield
washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate.
When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and
the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles,unless
your wipers had already been on. In that case, thewipers
will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier.
maxked WIPER.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the bandto MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on mist longer.
For delayed wiping cycles, you can set the wiper speed
for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be
very useful in lightrain or snow. Turn the band to
choose the delay time. The closer to LOW, the shorter
the delay time.
For steady wiping cycles, at low speed, turn the band
away from you to the LOW position.
For high-speed
vision.
wiping, turn the band further to HIGH. To stop the
wipers, move the band to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
fiom seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage,
be sure to clear ice and snowfiom the wiper blades before
using them. If they’re fiozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them.If your blades do become damaged,
get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice canoverload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
2-54
1
In freezing weather,don’t use your washeruntil
the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your
Rear Window Washermiper
I The rear window
1: 77
switch is located
c wiper
c in the instrument
Q
hf
I
C
panel switchbank.
0
Cruise Control (Option)
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise
control disengages.
I
Push the wiper symbol on the bottom of the button to
turn on the intermittent wiper. To turn off the wiper,
gently push the top of the button.
To wash and wipe the rear window, push in the washer
symbol onthe top of the button. Washer fluid will spray
as long as the button is held in. When the top of the
button is released, the wiper will continue to cycle three
more times.
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already
on, push on the top of the button with the wash symbol
on it. Push in the bottom of the button to continue the
intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle
is completed.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drivesafely at a steadyspeed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads.
2-55
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. (See
“Traction Control System” in theIndex.) When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
Setting Cr+o Control
1
i
~
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise,you might hita button
and go into cruise whenyou don’t wantto. You
could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the
cruise contro’l switch
off until you want to use it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
2-56
3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the ac’celeratorpedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once
you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, you can
move the cruise control switch from ON to
RESUME/AGCEL (WA) for about half a second.
You’ll go right back upto your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at WA longer than half a second,
the vehicle will keepgoing faster until you releasethe
switch or apply the brake.So unless you wantto go
faster, don’t hold theswitch at WA.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
0
Use the accelerator pedalto get to the higher speed.
Push the SET button at theend of the lever, then
release thebutton and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise atthe higher speed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce speed while using
cruise control:
0
Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, then releaseit.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET
button for less than half a second.Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedalto increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
e Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to WA for less
than half a second and then releaseit. Each time
you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will work whether or not you
have set an initial cruise control speed.
2-57
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
Wow well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have tostep on the
accelerator pedal tomaintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on thebrake pedal; or
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
<ooz Turning the dial to t h i s setting turns on:
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-58
Parking Lamps
A light sensor on top of‘theinstrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL system
will make your front parkhum signal lamps come on in
daylight when:
Sidemarker Lamps
0
The ignition is on,
Taillamps
0
the headlamp switch is off and
Instrument Panel Lights
0
the parking brake is released.
0
20 Turning the dial to this setting turns on the
headlamps, together with:
0Turning the dial to this setting turns off all the lamps
and lights.
Lamps On Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the ignition
to OFF or LOCK while leaving the lamps on, you will
hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
When the DRL are on, only your front parking and turn
signal lamps will be on. Your instrument panel won’t be
lit up.
When it’s dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will
come on automatically. When it’s bright enough outside,
the exterior lamps will go outand the DRL will turn on.
Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any time
you need to.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL or exterior lamps off,
set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF or
LOCK. Then start the vehicle. The D l U will stay off
until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-59
-
Fog Lamps
1”
b
The fog lamps switch is
located in the instrument
panel switchbank. Push the
fog lamp symbol on the
rocker button to turn on
the lamps.
When your D l U are on, the headlamp switch must first
be turned from the off position before the fog lampscan
be turned on. At night, when DRL automatically turns
on your headlmps, the fog lamps can be turned ow
when the headlamps switch is in any position.
Your fog lamps will go off when you switch tohigh
beams. Using your high beams in fog is not recommended.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
Turn the control, locatedbelow the headlamps switch, to
The indicator light will glow. Push theribbed part of the
switch to turn them off. The indicator lightwill go off*
Your parking lamps or headlamps must be on for your
fog lamps to go on,
2-60
of the instrument
the right to increase the brightness
panel lights, and to the leftto d’ecreasethe brightness.
Turn the controlall the way to the left to
turn them off,
Interior Lamps Control
Turn the dial all theway to the right to turn on the
interior lamps, if the interior lamps override
switch is
off. Turn the dial to the left to turn
the lamps off.
Interior Lamps Override Switch
I
This switch is located in the
overhead console
switchbank. Press the
symbol on the bottom of the
rocker switch to override
control of the interior lamps
and turn off powerto the
courtesy lamps, reading
lamps and glove box lamp.
:I
c
-I
Press the top of the interior lamps override rocker switch
to turn power back on to the interior lamps. This will
allow the lamps to stay on when any door is open.
Delayed Illumination
The delayed illumination feature will continue to
illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have
been closed so that you can find your ignition and
buckle your safety belt at night. Delayed illumination
will not occur while the ignition is in RUN or
ACCESSORY. After 25 seconds have passed, the
interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade
out before the 25 seconds have passed if you:
0
turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped) or
. .
lock all the doors using the power door lock switch
or the key.
To turn the delayed illumination feature off or on, see
“Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
2-61
Exit Lighting
Illuminated Entry
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for
about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from
the ignition switch. If you twn the ignition switch to
RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The
lamps will also fade outif you lock thedoors with the
power door l’ockswitch or theremote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
With illuminated entry, the interior of your vehicle is
illuminated so you can seeinside before you enter your
vehicle. The lamps will come un for 40 seconds if you
unlock your door usin,gyour key or the remotekeyless
entry transmitter (if equipped) and the ignitionis in
LOCK or OFF. After 40 seconds have passed, the
interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn
off before the40 seconds if you:
When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled. The
interior lamps will stay on while any door orliftgate is
open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the liftgate
are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after dl doors have been closed if they have not b’een
locked, see “Delayed Illumination” earlier in
this section.
To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see “Locks
and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
lock all the doors using the key,
press LOCK on the power door lock switch or
press LOCK on the remote keyless entrytransmitter
(if equipped).
When any dooris opened, illuminated entryis cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or liftgate
is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the
liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after dl doom have been closed if they have not been
locked. See “Delayed Illumination” laterin this section.
2-62
Front Reading Lamps
Rear Reading Lamps
There are two reading lamps in the third row headliner,
above the outboard seating positions. If your vehicle
does not have dual sliding doors, there is also a reading
lamp in the second row on the driver’s side.
To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the
lamp lens.
Dome Lamp
This lamp is located in the center of your vehicle and
has no switch of its own. It will go on each time you
open the doors, unless you enable the interior
lamps override.
There are two reading lamps in the overhead console.
To turn on either reading lamp, press the lens of the
lamp. To turn off the lamp, press the lens again.
Cargo Lamp
This lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle, above
the liftgate opening, and has no switch of its own. It will
go on each time you open the doors, unless you enable
the interior lamps override.
2-63
Battery Saver
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
interior or underhood lamps on. If you leave any of
these 1,ampson while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF,
they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The
lamps won’t come back on again until you:
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The control on the driver’s
door controls both outside
rearview mirrors.
turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
@
turn the interior lamps dial all the way to the right,
then slightly back to the left; or
open (or close and reopen) a door that is closed.
Note that if your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km)
on the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Mirrors
Inside RayNight Rearview Mirror
To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever
toward you(to the night position). To return the mirror
to the day position, push the lever away from you.
2-64
Turn the control to the left to select the driver’s side
rearview mirror, or to the right to select the passenger’s
side rearview mirror. Then use the control to adjust each
mirror so that you can just see
the side of your vehicle
when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control
in the center off position. This prevents moving the
mirrors accidentally once you have them adjusted.
Storage Compartments
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward.
In the rearward position, they will fold almost flush with
the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in
automatic car washes.
Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store many
items. If you have the extended wheelbase version, you
can carry things as large as a 4’ x 8’ piece of plywood.
You can also use the floor pins that are used to attach the
seats, to secure larger loads. This section also describes
storage areas for specific items like sunglasses and cups.
Your mirrors have a blue tint to reduce glare while
driving at night.
Glove Box
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Your vehicle has a glove box belowthe instrument panel.
To open the glove box, lift the latch release. Use the key
to lock or unlock the glove box.
Th’eglove box door has a detent to prevent the door
from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door
is partway open, then pull the door down if you need it
fully open. To close the glove box, the door must be
pushed up past the detent.
In the door of the glove box, you will find a tissue pack
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are. holder and clip for a penor pencil.
If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
2-65
Compact Overhead Console
Overhead Console (If Equipped)
The front overhead console includes two reading lamps,
a storage compartrnent and a switchbank.
To turn either readinglamp on or off, press the
lamp lens.
The switchbank has switches for the optional Power
Sliding Door, Power Sliding Door Enable, Interior
Lights Override, Power QuarterWindows and the
Power Sunroof.
2-66
The optional. front overhead console has reading lamps,
a switchbank, storage compartments, including one fur
your garage door opener and another one for your
sunglasses, and a Driver Information Center(DIC). The
features of the optional overhead console are explained
on the followingp'ages.
Reading Lamps
To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the
lamp lens.
Garage Door Opener Compartment
You can store your garage door opener in the rear
compartment of your overhead console, and operate it
from this position. To install your garage door opener,
follow these instructions:
1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward
Remove the piece of self-sticking [email protected]
2. Peel the protective baclung from theVelcro and
press it firmly to the back of your garage
door opener.
3. Line up the button of the garage door opener with
one of the four buttons on the compartment door.
Make sure the garage door opener button is facing
down and press the opener firmly into place.
4. Once the opener is installed, use the black pegs
inside the compartment door to make sure the lined
area on the compartment door will contact the
control button on your garage door opener
when pressed.
2-67
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
5 . Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when
you press the button.
2-68
To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the
overhead console, press the release button. Then pull the
compartment down to the full open position.
Cupholders
Storage Bin
There are cupholders on the inboard side of the front
passenger's seat and the right side of the second row
bench seat.
At the base of the center instrument panel console, there
To use the cupholders, simply pull down the tray. Keep
the trays up when not in use.
Inside the bin, you will find a tray that slides out. Slide
the tray all the way toward the rear of the vehicle until
the tray locks onto the plastic tabs at the end of the guide
rails. The tray holds CDs or cassettes in the center area.
You can also store cassettes in the left side area. The
right side area can hold either the coinholder, whichlifts
out, or another cassette. The tray canbe removed for
cleaning or when you want to replace the selection of
CDs or cassettes. Slide the tray back into the storage bin
before closing the bin door. The tray can also be placed
in the glove box for locked storage if desired.
Your vehicle has storage compartments and cupholders
on either side of the vehicle, next to the third row seats.
The seatbacks have cupholders that can be used when
the seatbacks are folded down.
is a storage bin. To open the bin, lift the latch release
and the door will fold down.
'
2-69
Removing and Replacing theTray
To remove the tray, slide it almost all the way out. Don’t
let the tray lock over the plastic tabs at the end of the
guide rails (A). Lift the tray out of the guide rails. The
rubber mat under the tray also lifts out for cleaning.
When the rubber mat is replaced, be sure thetabs at the
back of the mat are seated in the slots at the back of the
storage bin.
The dividers in the tray can be removed by squeezing
the p1a;stictabs on the bottom of the dividers, while
pulling up. Replace the dividers by sliding them down
until the tabs click into place.
To replace the tray, line up the guides on the bottom of
the tray with the guide rails in thestorage bin door. Slide
the tray back in.
Front Seat Storage Bin
The storage bin is located under the manual front
passenger’s seat. To open the bin, lift the handle and
slide the drawer out.
2-70
Front Seat Storage Net
Saddlebag (Option)
The optional saddlebag provides extra storage space. It
is found in the rear of your vehicle. It is designed to be
stored in the side convenience nets.
Rear Storage Compartments and
Cupholders
Your vehicle has a storage compartment and
cupholder on either side of the vehicle, next tothe
third row seat(s).
Convenience Net (Option)
There is a storage net that stretches between the front
seats. Pull the hooks towards the passenger’s seat and
insert them into the holes next to the cupholder.
The optional convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over during
sharp turns or quick stops and starts. Install the
convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, just inside
the liftgate.
To store the net, lift the hooks up and out of the holes.
The net does not detach from the driver’s seat.
When not inuse, it is recommend that you unhook the
net to extend its lifeand retain its elasticity.
2-71
I
Attach the upperloops to the posts on either side of the
liftgate opening (the label on the net should be in the
upper left-hand corner). Attachthe lower hooks to the
metal rings on the floor.
The side of the convenience net closest to the front of
the vehicle is higher thanthe side closest to the liftgate.
Once you’ve loaded items into the net, stretch the higher
side of the net up and over the top of the load to hold it
firmly in place.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100
lbs. (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier
loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, as
far forward as you can.
2-72
When not in use, it isrecommend that you take down
the convenience net to extend its life and retain its
elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store the net in
the pouch behind either front seat, in the optional
saddlebag or in one of the side convenience nets.
When not in use, it is recommend that you take down
the convenience nets to extend their life and retain
their elasticity.
Luggage Carrier (Option)
Side Convenience Nets
The side convenience nets are designed to hold smaller
items (about 8 lbs. (4 kg.)) than the large convenience
net. Attach the loops to the posts on the rear side panels,
near the jack storage area.
If you try to carrysomething on topof your
vehicle that is longeror wider than theluggage
carrier like paneling, plywood,a mattress, and
so forth the wind can catchit as you drive
along. This can cause youto lose control. What
you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and
this could causeyou or other drivers have
to a
collision, and of course damage yourvehicle. You
may be ableto carry something like this
inside.
But, never carry something longer or wider than
the luggage carrier on top
of your vehicle.
---
2-73
A
~~
If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has
slats and side rails attached to the roof, as well as sliding
crossrails and places to use for tying things down. These
let you load some things on top of your vehicle, as long
as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
2-74
~,
NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than 150 lbs.
(68 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle.
When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a
proper size and weight, put it on the slats, as far
forward as you can. Then slide the crossrail up
against the rear of the load, tohelp keep it from
moving. You can then tie it down.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle’’in
the Index.
Use the adjustable tiedown
loops in the side rails to
help secure large loads.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggagecarrier and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Reposition the tiedowns by turning them to the left, then
slide them along the side rail. Turn the tiedowns to. the
right to tighten them in place.
Bumper strips on the luggagecarrier crossrails help to
ensure aquieter ride.
Turn the release knobs to the left to unlock the
crossrails. Slide the crossrails forward or back, as
needed, to accommodate loads of various sizes.
If you wish toattach the luggagetiedowns or other
compatible bicycle or ski accessory racks to the
crossrail, use the adjustabletapped plates under the
bumper strips,
After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the
release knobs by turning them to the right. This will lock
the crossrails in place.
2-75
’I
Lift theend of the bumper strip with a flathead screw
driver and cut off enough of the strip to access the
tapped plates.
2-76
After removing the tie’downsor other equipment, be sure
to reinstall the the pieceof bumper strip that was cut.
Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
NOTICE:
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in the
middle section of the instrument panel, below the
switchbank. Pull out the drawer to use the ashtray.
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, grasp the edge of
the ashtray withyour fingertips and pull up and out, in a
rocking motion.
To use the lighter, push it inall the way and let go.
When it’s
ready,
it will pop back by itself.
Side Ashtrays
To open the ashtray, press the left side and turnit open.
I NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating.If you do, it won’t be ableto
back away from the heating element when
it’s
ready. That can make
it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating
element.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, press the snuffer as
you lift up the bottom of the ashtray.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and swing
them to the side.
I
1
VisorVanity Mirrors
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.
2-77
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
(IfEquipped)
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.The lamps will come on when you open
the cover.
Accessory Inflator System (Option)
Yous vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator. With
it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and
basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires up
to the proper pressure.
The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the
driver’s side. To remove the cover, pull the tab on the
cover and pull it off.
The air inflator kit is stored in the glove box or in the
rear saddlebag, if your vehicle has this option. It
includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage
and nozzle adapters.
2-78
Inflatingsomething too muchcanmake it
explode, and you or others could be injured. Be
sure to readtheinflatorinstructions,andinflate
any object onlyto its recommended pressure.
To use your air inflator system, attach the appropriate
nozzle adapter, if required, to the end of the hose that
has the pressure gage. Then attach that end of the hose
to the object you wish to inflate. Remove the protective
cap covering the outlet. Attach the other end of thehose
to the outlet. Press the ON switch. The ON switchwill
work even with the ignition off.
If the air inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may
be blown or installed incorrectly. See “Fuses andCircuit
Breakers” in the Index or seeyour dealer for service.
Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about
10 minutes. To reset, press the ON switch again.
Don’t run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes at
one time. If you do, you may damage the system. After
30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the
air inflator.
To turn off the inflator, press OFF and detach the hose,
first from the inflated object, then from the outlet.
Replace the protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools in
the pouch, and store in the glove box.
To replace the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the
cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to secure
the cover.
2-79
Accessory Power Outlets
The power outlets can be used to plug in electrical
equipment such as a c'ellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
When not in use, always cover the rear outlet withthe
protective cap.
To replace the cover on the rear outlet, line up the tabs at
the back of the cover and put the cover in place. Push
down the tab to secure the cover.
I NOTICE:
The rear power outlet is located in the rear compartment
on the driver's side. TQremove the cover, pull the tab on
the cover and pull it off.
The Eront power outlet is located next to theashtray and
lighter. Pull the cover down to use the power outlet.
2-80
Whenusingtheaccessorypoweroutlets:
,,
Maximum load of any electrical equipment
should not exceed20 amps.
Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment
when not inuse. Leaving electrical
equipment onfor extended periodscan
drain your battery.
Power Sunroof (Option)
The sunroof has a sun shade to let in light without
opening the sunroof. Slide the shade back to open.
on the far right of the
overhead console
switchbank. The sunroof
has two positions, vent and
full open.
To fully close the sunroof, press and hold the symbol
side of the rocker button until the sunroof slides back to
a closed position. (The sunroof can be stopped ina
partially closed position by releasing the symbol side of
the rocker button any time during the close cycle.)
If the sunshade is not already opened, it will open when
the sunroof is opened to vent or full open.
NOTICE:
The optional sunroof panel
is not designed to be
removed. It is made to open and close but to
remain attachedto the vehicle.
Press and release the ribbed side of the rocker button to
open the sunroof to the initial vent position. To open the
sunroof from the initial vent position to the full open
position, press and release the ribbed side of the rocker
button a second time. This will automatically open the
sunroof to the full open position. (The open cycle can be
stopped anywhere in its travel by quickly pressing the
ribbed side of the rocker button a third time.)
2-81
Instrument Panel
2-82
Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glancehow your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast
you’re going, how muchfuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll
need to drive safely
and economically.
Refer to the accompanying diagram of your instrument panel to locate the components listed below.
A. Side Vents
B. Front Vent
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
M. Ignition Switch
N. Steering Wheel
(Option)
Controls
Touch
E. Instrument Cluster
0. Climate Controls
P. Rear Fan Controls
Q. Accessory Power Outlet
E CenterVents
R. Storage Bin
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
S. Remote CD Player (Option)
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Audio System
Side Vents
T. Instrument Panel Switchbank
Lamps Switch
lJ. LightedAshtray
Hood Release
V. Glove Box
Steering Wheel Touch Controls (Option)
W. Front Vents
L. Horn
X. Fuse Panel
2-83
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages thatare explained on the following pages,
2-84
Speedometer and Tamper
Resistant Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you see
silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know that
someone has probably tried to turn it back, so the
numbers may not be true.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
If it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
0
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set it to zero. To set it to zero,
push the reset button, which is located above and to the
right of the temperature gage.
2-85
Tachometer
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
1 NOTICE:
Do not operate theengine with the tachometerin
the red area, or engine
damage may occur.
2-86
I
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to €etyou know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 70 seconds. If the
driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the words AIR BAG. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag
module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag’’ in
the Index.
AI RBAG
United States
Canadian
This light will come on when you start your engine, and
it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go
out. This means the system is ready.
2-87
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readinesslight should flash for a few
seconds whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.
Charging System Indicator Light
I-fl
The charging system light
will come on when you turn
on the ignition as a check to
show you it is working. It
will remain on as long as
the engine is not running.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. Itcould indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drainyour battery.
2-88
Tf you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when youset your parking brake. Thelight
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t releasefully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have abrake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need bothparts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
.
IJnited States
,
Canadian
This light should come on briefly when you hun the
ignition key toRUN. If it doesn’t comeon then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light isflashing, have
the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index,)
Your brake system maynot be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light isstill on or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing
after you’ve pulled offthe road and stopped
carefully, havethe vehicle towedfor service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and it will stay on
for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there could be a problem with your
regular brakes. Pull off the road and stop carefully. You
may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.)
Your regular brake system may not be working
properly if the anti-lock brake system warning
light is flashing. Driving with the antiulock brake
system warning light flashing can lead to
an
accident. After you’ve pulledoff the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
2-90
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
light is on but not flashing and the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System Warning Light
(Option)
This warning light should
come on briefly as you start
the engine. If the warning
light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,there
may be a problem withyour traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjustyour
driving accordingly.
The traction control system warning light maycome on
for the following reasons:
If there’s abrake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the tractioncontrol system
will turn off and the warning light will come on. If
your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on until your brakes cool down.
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turnoff and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period sf time when the
system is turned ow, your vehicle needs service.
Low Traction Light (Option)
If your vehicle has the
LOW
TRACTION
traction control system,
there will be a LOW
TRACTION lighton the
instrument panel.
When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a brakingskid, or when your traction
control system is limiting wheel spin, the LOW
TRACTION light will come on.Slippery road
conditions may exist if this light comes on, so adjust
your driving accordingly. The light will come on and
stay on for four seconds when your anti-lock system
adjusts brake pressure for less than four seconds or
when your tractioncontrol system limits wheel spin for
less than four seconds. Otherwise, the lightwill go out
as soon as the anti-lock system stops adjusting brake
pressure ‘or the tractioncontrol system stops limiting
wheel spin.
The LOW TRACTION light also comes on briefly, as a
bulb check, when theengine is started. If the light
doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to
tell you whenthe system is active.
2-91
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
100
n
United States
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pulloff the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon aspossible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will come on
when your engine gets
too hot.
40
Canadian
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer movesinto the red area, your engine is
too hot!
2-92
If this light comes on, it means that your engine coolant
has overheated. Ifyou have been operatingyour vehicle
under normal driving conditions, you shouldpull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon
as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,’’ thismanual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Low Coolant Light
1+1
If this light comes on,
your system is low on
coolant and the engine
may overheat.
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
CHECK
I
United States
Canadian
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is calledOBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure
that emissionsare at acceptable levelsfor the lifeof the
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The
SERVICE ENGINEi SOON light comes on and a chime
will sound to indicate that there is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often willbe indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
2-93
If the LightIs Flashing
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on,as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignitionis on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’tcome on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increasesvehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-94
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducingvehiclespeed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon asit ispossible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, waitat least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recentlychanged brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicleinto gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engineis warrned up.)
This will be detected bythe system and cause the light
to turn on.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel capwill allow fuel toevaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the lightoff.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually becorrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn thelight off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
air are sucked into the fuel linecausing a misfire.The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
If you .perience one or more of these conditions,
change me fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fixany mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-95
Oil Pressure Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with an oil pressure warning
light. Your oil pressure light
lets you know when you
may have a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from
neglected oil
problems can be costly and
is not covered by
your warranty.
Low Oil LevelLight
When the engine is running and this light comes on, the
engine oil level may be too low. There may also be
another problem causing low oil pressure.
Don’t keep
driving if the oil pressure
is low. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire.You or otherscould be burned.
Check your oil as soon asoossible and have vour
vehicle serviced.
2-96
OIL
LEVEL
United
States
L M L
Canadian
If this light comes on, it means your engine is low
on oil.
You need to check the oil level right away. Have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
Door Ajar Light
F
I
'I I
This light will come onif
any of the doors or the
liftgate arenot completely
closed and the ignition is
turned to RUN or START.
Power Sliding Door Warning Light
This light will come on if
the power sliding door is
not completely closed and
the ignition is turned to
RUN or START.
If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) while the
power sliding door is open or in the process of closing,
and the power sliding door override feature is disabled,
a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the
power
sliding door is not completely closed.
If you shift the transaxle out PARK
of
(P) and
accelerate before the power sliding door latches
closed, the door may reverse to the open position.
A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and
be injured. Always make sure the power sliding
door is closed andlatched before you drive away.
c
2-97
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads FULL (F).
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
0
United States
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up
than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated
the tank was half full, but it actually tooka little more
or less than halfthe tank‘s capacity tofill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner,
brake or speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Canadian
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left, when the ignition is on. When the gage first
indicates EMPTY (E), you still have a little fuel left, but
you should get more soon.
After filling the fuel tank, the gage will not read
FULL (F) until the ignition is turned on.
2-98
When there is between
4 gallons (15 L) and
2 gallons (7.6 L) of fuel left
in the tank, the warning
light next to the fuel symbol
will go on.
This light will also come on when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is not running, to show you it is
working. If it doesn’t come on as you start your vehicle,
have it fixed right away.
Driver Information C. >er(DIC)
(Optioklj
Mode Button (MODE): Press this button to cycle
through three modes of operation -- Off,
Compass/Temperature and Trip Computer made.
In the Trip Computer mode, pressing theMODE
button cycles through the five displays.
Press the
MODE button after the lastTrip Computer display to
return the DIC to the OFF mode.
O f f No driver information is displayed inthis mode
of operation.
TemperaturdCompass Mode: One of eight compass
readings and the outside temperatureare displayed. If
the temperature is below 38 "F (3 "C), the temperature
reading will toggle between displaying the outside
temperature and the word "ICE' for two minutes.
Compass Variance
The DIC will show information about the vehicle and
the surroundings.
English/Metric Button (EM): You can change the
display to a metric orEnglish reading at any time by
pressing EM.
Compass variance is thedifference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the
country, the difference is great enough to cause the
compass to give false readings.If this occurs, the
compass variance must be set.
2-99
Setting the Variance
The display will show all the display segments for half a
second to acknowledge the change in zone number.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the calibration process may not be complete. In
these cases the calibration symbol, C, will be displayed
where the compass reading is normally displayed.
To calibrate the compass, in an area free fromlarge
metal objects, make three 360" turns. The calibration
symbol will turn off and the compass reading will
be displayed.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the calibration
symbol does not appear, you must manually put the
compass into the calibration mode.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC
to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the E M and
MODE buttons for approximatelyfive seconds. The last
entered variance zone number will be displayed. Press the
E M button until the proper variance number, as shown on
the map, is showing. Press theMODE button to set the
new variance zone and resume norrnal operation.
2-100
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the E/M and
MODE buttons for at least 10 seconds until the
calibration symbol appears. Release both buttons and
complete three 360" turns in an area free fromlarge
metal objects. The calibration symbol will turn off and
the compass reading will be displayed.
Error Displays
0 An error of the vehicle’s speed sensor or fuel sender
will cause -E- to be displayed.
In the absence of vehicle communications, a double
dash -- is displayed.
Trip Computer
There are five trip computer displays which may be
stepped through by pushing the MODE button. The
information will appear in the following order:
0
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECON): This shows
the average fuel economy since the last reset.
0
Instantaneous Fuel Economy (INST ECON):
This shows fuel economy for the most recent
second of driving.
0
Trip Range (RANGE): This shows the estimated
distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel.
The fueleconomy used to calculate range is based on
the last few hours of driving.
0
Trip Fuel Used (FUEL USED): This shows the
accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
0
Average Spleed(AVG SPEED): This shows the
average speed since the last reset.
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold the MODE and ELM buttons for atleast
two seconds. The reset is acknowledged with the display
showing all segments on for a period of half a second. A
reset can only be done inAVG ECON, FUEL USED
and AVG SPEED displays. Resetting affects all three
displays regardless of which display you are in.
2-101
b
NOTES
2-103
b
NOTES
2-104
-
Section 3 Cumfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this se'ction,you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehi'cle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-10
3- 11
3-15
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Rear Climate Control (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo
Setting the Clock for All Systems Except
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Equalizer (If Equipped)
3- 19
3-21
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Equalizer (If Equipped)
3 -24
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
3-26
3 -27
3-30
3-3 1
3-3 1
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Integrated Windshield Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Temperatl
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your cornfort control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
The center knob controls the temperature of the air
coming through the system. Turn it to the left (toward
the blue area) for cooler air. Turn it to the right (toward
the red area) for warmer air.
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilationin your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
nob
Mode Knob
This knob selects the direction of where the air will
enter the vehicle.
+e
/J UPPER: This setting directs outside air through
the instrument panel outlets.
+e
+#
BI-LEV: This setting directs outside air into your
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your
upper body through the front instrument panel outlets,
while warmed air is directed through the heater ducts at
your feet.
+/J
Fan Knob
The left knobis the fan knob and selects the force
of air
you want. Turn the knob to the right to increasefan speed
and to the left to decrease fan speed. The fan must be
turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate.
3-2
e
LOWER: This setting brings in most of the air
through the floor ducts. This setting is alsoused to send
air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the
front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to
the rear of the vehicle.
w
.
+ , DEFOG: This setting directs air to the windshield
and through the floor ducts. This mode is particularly
useful during cold or inclement weather because of your
vehicle’s larger windshield area.
w.
+#
DEFROST This setting directs most of the air to
the windshield and side window vents.
Mode Buttons
RECIRC: Press tks button (the light will glow)
a
to limit theamount of fresh air entering your vehicle by
recirculating much of the air insideyour vehicle. You
may use this setting to limitodors entering your vehicle.
Press the OUTSIDE AIR button ‘(thelight on the
RECIRC button will go off) to letoutside air circulate
into the vehicle.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button (the light will
glow) to send outside air intoyour vehicle. Using this
setting while trying to defrostor defog the windows will
help clear thevents of moisture. Press the RECIRC
button (the light on theOUTSIDE AIR button will go
o m to limit outside air entering the
vehicle. When the
DEFOG or DEFROST setting isselected, the system
will automatically go to OUTSIDE AIR mode.
Air Conditioning
On very hot days, your vehicle will cool down more
quickly and eclonomically if YOU open the windows long
enough to lethot, inside air escape. For allsettings,
adjust the temperature control knob and fan speed
as desired.
To get maximum cooling or a quickcool-down on very
hot days, press the A/C and RECIRC buttons (the lights
will glow) and turn the temperatureknob to the left
mode knob to direct
(toward the blue area). Adjust the
the air to thedesired location. This setting should not be
used for long periods of time because the air may
become too cold and dry. Push the A/C button again (the
light will goof0 to turn off the air conditioning.
When the air conditioner compressor is on,you may
sometimes notice slight changes in yourvehicle’s engine
performance and power. This is normal, The
system is
designed to help fuel economy while itmaintains the
desired cooling level.
The airconditioner removes moisture from theair, so
you may sometimes notice waterdripping from under
your vehicle’s engine compartmentwh’enit is idlingor
after it has been turned off. This is normal.
3-3
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Turn thetemperature knob to the right (toward the red
area) to warm the air.
To rapidly defrost the windshield, turn the temperature
control knob all the way to the right (to the red area) and
turn the mode knob to DEFROST.
In the LOWER mode, outside air will be brought in and
sent through the floor outlets. The heater works best if
you keep your windows closed while using it.
The BI-LEV setting is designed for use on sunny days
when the air is only moderately warm or cool. On days
like these, the sun may adequately warm your upper
body, but your lower body maynot be warm enough.
For the best results, turn the temperature control knob to
the middle position, and then adjust it for comfort.
If you have the optional engine coolant heater and use it
during cold weather, 0 OF (- 18 C) or lower, your heating
system will provide heat more quickly because the
engine coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
O
3-4
Adjust the fan to the highest speed.
To keep the windshield clear and bring in heated air
through the heater ducts, turn the mode knob
to DEFOG.
When the temperature outside is above freezing, the air
conditioner compressor will run in these settings to help
remove moisture from the air.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
vents located on the top of the instrument panel. For
additional side window defogging, turn the mode knob
to the BI-LEVEL setting and adjust the fanto the
highest speed. Aim the side vents on the instrument
panel toward the side windows. For increased airflow to
the side vents, close the center vents.
Rear Window Defogger
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the
defogger grid on the rear window.
Press FEAR (the light will
glow) to warm the defogger
grid on the rear window.
d
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something
else sharp
on the insideof the rear window. If you do, you
could cut. or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty.
The rear window defogger will turn off automatically
after about 10 minutes of use. If yon turn it on again, the
defogger will operate for about five minutes. You can
also turn the defogger off by turning off the ignition or
pressing the switch again.
3-5
Rear Climate Control(If Equipped)
Rear Fan Control
If you have the optional rear climate control, the rear
seat passengers can control the temperature and the
amount of air directed to the rear of the vehicle. The
amount of air directed to the rear of the vehicle can also
be adjusted using the front control for the rear fan.
This option comes with the rear climate controls.
Set the main climate control mode knob to LOWER,
DEFOG or DEFROST, when outside temperatures are
cold or moderate, to send airto the rear of the vehicle
through the lower vents.
Set the main climate control mode knob to UPPER or
BI-LEV to send air tothe rear of the vehicle through the
headliner outlets.
To send conditioned air to the rear of the vehicle, press
the A/C button (the light will glow) on the main climate
controls. If you do not select A/C, air directed to the rear
of the vehicle will be cabin temperature.
Please keep the area around the base of the center
instrument panel console and the area between and
under the front seats free of objects that would obstruct
airflow to'the rear of the vehicle.
8
1
The rearfan control is
locate'd below the
climate control system,
in the switchbank.
Turn the fan to the desired setting for the amount of air
to be directed to the rear of the vehicle. The temperature
of the air will be the same as the air in the front of the
vehicle. The rear fan control in the instrument panel
switchbank has an R setting which allows the rear
passengers to use the rear climate control knobs t~
adi, the air through the rear air outlets.
3-6
Rear Comfort Controls
\
\
The rear climate control h o b s are in a panel next to the
second row seat. If your vehicle has the optional dual
sliding doors, the panel is above the driver's seat.
Turn the temperature knob to the left (to the blue
area) for cooler air, or tothe right (to the red area) for
warmer air.
To maintain a comfortable temperature in the rear, use
either rear fan control to adjust the force of air coming
through the rear outlets.
Select the desired climate control mode using the
directional controls on the instrument panel (see "Mode
Knob" earlier in the section). The mode you choose will
regulate both the front and r e a climate control systems.
3-7
Rear Air Vents
Ventilation System
To maximize airflowthrough the rear heater outlet,
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when Et is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the fan is running.
place the left bucket seat inthe second row in the
forward position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in
the Index).
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Push
the outlet up or down to direct airflow to your
preference. Increase or reduce the amount of airflow by
opening and closing the louvers. Opening and closing
the louvers will also direct airflow from side to side.
The air-flow through the vents can be shut off
completely by turning the thumb-wheel next to each
outlet all the way down. You can also stop outside air
from entering by turning the fan to OFF and pushing the
RECIRC button.
The vent behind the left rear seat is the cold air return
vent. Be sure tokeep it free of obstructions.
Please keep the area around the base of the center
instrument panel console and between and under the
front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to
the rear.
3-8
Ventilation Tips
Audio Systems
Keep the hood and front air inlet free sf ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). This will
allow the heater and defroster to work much better,
reducing the chance of fogging the inside of
your windows.
e When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turnthe
blower fan to “5” for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of sn’ow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
Keep the area around the base o f the center
instrument panel console and the air path under the
front seats clear of objects, This helps slir to circulate
throughout your vehicle. .:
.$
In cold weather, operating the system in the
OUTSIDE AIR mode will improve the time it takes
to warm the vehicle.
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the mostenjoymentout of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting themost out of the
advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK down arrow until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold the SEEK up arrow until the
correct minute appears on the display.
Setting the Clock for All Systems Except
AM-FM Stereo
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold MIN until the correct minute appears. There
will be a two-second delay before the clock goes into
time-set mode, and the colon on thedisplay will blink
while in this mode.
3-9
AM-FM Stereo
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM and
FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and
off and controls the volume. To turn the radio on and to
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it tothe
left to decrease volume and to turn the radio off.
RCL: Press this knob to recall the station being played
or to display the clock.
3-10
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four numbered pushbuttons within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
pushbutton, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the
same buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble, If a station is we& noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble. Adjusting the Speakers
BALANCE: Turn the control behind the upper knob to
move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower h o b to move
the sound to the front orrear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Flaying the Radio
POWER-VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn theknob to the right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time withthe ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this knob to recall the station frequency.
3-11
Finding a Station
Setting theTone
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
BASS: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or
decrease bass.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’renot using it.
TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase
or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to thenext
higher or lower station and staythere.
Adjusting the Speakers
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six A M , six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The
middle position balances the sound between the
speakers.
1. Turn the radio on.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-12
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes thatare
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
The display will show an arrow to show which side of
the tape isplaying. When the down indicator arrow is
lit, selections listed on the bottom sideof the cassette are
playing. When the up arrow is lit, selections listed on the
top side of the cassette are playing. The tape player
automatically begins playing the other side when it
reaches the end of the tape.
If E and a numberappear on the radio display, thetape
won’t playbecause of an error.
0
E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
the tape with the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold
open end down andtry to turn the right hub tothe left
with a pencil.Turn the tape over and repeat.If the
hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and
should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to
make sure your playeris working properly.
0
Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, writeit down and provide it to
your dealer whenreporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to
search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction
arrow blinks duringPREV or SEEK operation. Press
PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The
sound will muteduring PREV or SEEK operation.
NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to
search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the
button, the player willcontinue moving forward through
the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for NEXTor SEEK to
work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or
SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK uparrow to
stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or
SEEK operation.
PRUG (3): Press this buttonto play the other side of
the tape.
3-13
00 (4): Press this button to reduce background noise.
TAPEPLAY Press this button to change to the tape
Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display. function when theradio is on. Thetape symbol with an
arrow will appear onthe display when the tape is active.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
To return to playing the radio, press the AM-FM button.
from DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
REV (5): Press this buttonto reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to returnto playing speed. The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations duringREV operation by using
SEEK or TUNE.
FWD (6): Press this buttonto advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected
station while the tape advances. You may select stations
during FWD operation by usingSEEK or TUNE.
AM-FM: Press this buttonto play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
3-14
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if
this button is pressed first.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you shouldclean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player.See “Care of
Your Cassette TapePlayer” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press andhold EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Equalizer (If Equipped)
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPEFLAY button for three
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter. It will power upthe radio and
begin playing.
This override routine will remain activ'euntil EJECT
is pressed.
Playing the Radio
POWER-VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this knob to recall the station frequency.
3-15
Finding a Station
Adjusting the Speakers
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’renot using it.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
EQUALIZRW. A seven band equalizer is part of your
audio system. Slide thelevers up to boost or down to
reduce frequency range.
3-16
move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middIe
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to workbest with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE and BAL
controls just as you do for the radio. The display will
show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
When the down indicator arrow is lit, selections listed
on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. When the
up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the
cassette are playing. The tape player automatically
begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of
the tape.
If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an enor.
El& The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turnthe right hub to the
left with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If
the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be
damaged and should not be used in the player.
Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEM down arrow to
search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction
m o w blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press
PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The
sound will mute during PREV or SEEK oper,ation.
NEXT (2): Press this button ‘orthe SEEK up arrow to
search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the
button, the player will continue moving forward b o u g h
the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to
work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or
SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to
stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or
SEEM operation.
PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side
of the tape.
00 (4): Press this Dumm to reduce background noise.
Note that the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last-selected statiora while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by using
SEEK or TUNE.
3-17
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playingspeed. The radio will play the last-selected
station while the tape advances. You may select stations
during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is inthe player.
TAPEPLAY: Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an
arrow will appear onthe display when the tape is active.
To return to playing the radio, press the AM-FM button.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio off if this button is pressed first.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, butyou should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player,press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
3-18
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPEPLAY button for three
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
I. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and
begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(If Equipped)
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FMZ). Just:
Playing the Radio
POWER-VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right.
Turn it to theleft to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-19
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or
decrease bass.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
“single” discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller
discs are loaded in the same manner.
TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase
or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s veryhot,
the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may
appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it
could be that:
Adjusting the Speakers
0
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
move the sound to the front orrear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not usingthem.
Playing a CompactDisc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The compact disc symbol will
appear onthe display. If the ignition and the radio are
on, the disc will begin playing. CD will appear on the
display next to the compact disc symbol. If you want to
insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.
3-20
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to
go to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc.
NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to
go to the start of the next track. If you hold the button or
press it more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc.
RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. The display will show
RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Equalizer (If Equipped)
REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show
elapsed time.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
The display will show elapsed time.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to see how long the track has beenplaying.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
AM-FM: Press this button to play theradio when a disc
is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.
CDPLAY Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc or stop the
disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the
radio off.
Playing the Radio
POWER-VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. If you press the
knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
3-21
Finding a Station
Adjusting the Speakers
AM-FM: Press this button to switch bletween AM, FM1
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly SO it extends, Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six F M 1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. 1 ,sss AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
5.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizer is part of your
audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to
reduce frequency range.
3-22
position balances the sound b’etweenthe speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in,If the ignition and the radio are on,
the disc will begin playing. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off9first press EJECT.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may
appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it
could b’ethat:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If yourradio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to
go to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc.
NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to
go to the start of the next track. If you hold the button or
press it more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc.
RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. The display will show
RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
The display will show elapsed time.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio whena disc
is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.
CDPLAY: Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on.
EJECT Press this button to remove the disc or stop the
disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the
radio off.
REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. Release it toplay the passage. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show
elapsed time.
3-23
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to a
different music source than the front seat passengers
including AM-FM automatic tone control, cassette tapes
or CDs. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to
a cassette tape or CD through headphones while the
driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for
each headphone. Be aware that the front seat audio
controls always override the rear seat audio controls.
Note thatthis feature is intended for rear
seat passengers.
3-24
The following function is controlled by the primary
radio knob:
POWER-VOL: Push this knob twice to turn the rear
seat audio system on or off. ON or OFF will be
displayed for fiveseconds. The rear speakers will be
muted when the power is turned on. You may operate
the rear seat audio functions when the primary radio
power is off if the ignition is on.
The following functions are controlled by the rear seat
audio system buttons:
PWR: Press this button to turn the rear seat audio
system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted when
the power is turned on. You may operate the rear seat
audio functions even when the primary radio power
is off.
VUL: Press this' knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase volume and to the left to
decrease volume. Bush the knob back into itsstored
position when you're not using it. The upper VOL knob
controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob
controls the lower headphone,
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display will show yourfrequency
selection. If the front passengers are already listening to
AM-FM, the rear seat audio controller will not switch
between the bands and cannot change the frequency.
SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next higher
station and stay there. Press the down arrow to tune to
the next lower station and stay there. The display will
show your selection. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on the
front radio is in use.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer, while listening to a
cassette tape, press the up arrow to hear the next
selection on the tape. Press the down arrow to go back to
the previous selection. The SEEK button is inactive if
the cassette mode on the front radio is in use.
P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be listening
to something different for each of these functions
to work:
0
Press this button to seek through your preset radio
stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons. The
display will show your selections.
0
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
go to the other side of the tape.
TAPE CD: With a cassette tape in the player andthe
radio playing, press this button to play a cassette tape.
Press TAPE CD to switch between the tape and compact
disc if both are loaded. Press AM-FM to return to the
radio when a cassette tape or compact disc is playing.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Compact DiscPlayer and Equalizer or the Remote
Compact Disc Player, while listening to a compact disc,
press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the
compact disc. Press the down arrow to go back to the
previous selection. The number of the current track
selection will appear on thedisplay for five seconds.
The SEEK button is inactive if the CD mode on the
front radio is in use.
3-25
Remote Compact DiscPlayer (If Equipped)
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and E and a number appears
on the display, it could be that:
E20:The disc is upside down.
If you have this option, you can play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label
side up and insert it carefully into the player
(approximately half way). The disc will automatically
be gulled into the player. It is possible to load and
unload CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the
ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
3-26
0
F20:It is dirty, scratched or wet.
e E20: There's too much moisture in the air. (Wait
about an hour and try again.)
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.
PREV (I): Press this button to go back to the startof
the current track if mo're than eight seconds have played.
Press PREV again to go to theprevious track on
the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go
back to the start of the current track. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the down arrow again to go to previous tracks.
Press the up arrowto go to the next higher track on
the disc.
RDM: Press the number four preset button to enter the
random play mode. RDM will appear on the display.
While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be
played in random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or
NEXT while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT
track will be scanned randomly. Press the number four
preset button again to turn off RDM and return to
normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
TAPE PLAY: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
PLAY to switch between the tape and compact disc.
EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a
compact disc.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
[email protected] designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
3-27
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
5 . Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
'7. Press HR to make the first one ortwo digits agree
with your code.
8. Press BM-W after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to letyou know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirmyour
secret code.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit numb'er from
000 to 1999 and keep it ina safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3, Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
3-28
3. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
Note that with the ignition off, the THEFTLOCK
indicator will flash, indicating a secured radio.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with yourcode.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. PressAM-FM
after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code YOU have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the knition on before You can try again. When You
try again,you will only have three more chances (eight
tries per chance) to enter the correct code before
INOP appears.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together.Holdthem down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MIN again to m’akethe last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with
your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
. .
3-29
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
compact disc when the radio is playing.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound,
SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio
station and the down m o w to tune to the previous radio
station. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the
player will advance to the next selection with the up
arrow and go to the previous selection with the
down arrow.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio and remote playback functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
3-30
PRESET Press this button to play a station you have
programmed on the radio preset buttons. When a
cassette tape is playing, press this button to change
tape sides.
AM-FM: Press this button to choose AM, FM1 or FM2.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, it will stop
and the radio will play.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other.AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines.Try
reducing the treble toreduce this noise if youever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, butFM signals
will reach only about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km), Tall
buildings or hillscan interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound tocome and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normalcan be loud
and harmfulto your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearingloss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player,CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sureyou can
add whatyou want. If you can,it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation
of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check
with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone
units,
--
--
3-31
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that isnot cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, mined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, yourcassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If younotice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method far your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Bast No. 12344789).
3-32
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPEPLAY button for three
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning t h e .
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
B e sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
Care of Your Compact DiscPlayer
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Integrated WindshieldAntenna
The antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metallayer in
the windshield. If you loloknear the edges of the
windshield, you can see the outline of the antenna. The
connector is atthe top of the windshield, where the
headliner ends.
If you experience difficulty with remote transmitters,
such as a garage door opener, try pointing the device
through the very top of the windshield.
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the holeand the outer edge.
3-33
k% NOTES
3-34
fi
NOTES
3-35
3-36
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-11
4-13
4-13
4-15
4-16
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 17
4-20
4-2 1
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-29
4-32
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Pontiac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts fiom the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving
is a national tragedy. It’sthe number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needsto drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
0
MuscularCoordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show thatalmost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recentyears, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the
use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half theadult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it’s
against the law in every U S . state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, ginor vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limitat a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U S . states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it's even lower, The BAC limit forall
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we've seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them,
It's the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person's
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent, Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash,’that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.
Drinking and then arwing is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and
judgment can be affected by evena small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink anddrive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab;
or if
you’re with a group, designate driver
a
who will
not drink.
--
--
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that makeyour vehicle go where
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
you want it to go. They arethe brakes, the steering and
the accelerator.All three systems have to dotheir work
at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time.Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be lesswith one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play apart. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration, But even in 3’4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 k m h ) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between yourvehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means betterbraking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally butdon’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
.~
.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to
drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check
itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking
noise while this test is going on, and you may even
notice that your brakepedal moves a little. (You may
al,sohear a clicking noise if you leave the ignitionin
the RUN position for about four seconds before
starting the vehicle.) This is normal.
If there’s a problem withthe
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on or
flash. See “Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could, The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road i s wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get yourfoot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply yourbrakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
LOW
TRACTION
If your vehicle has the
traction control system, this
light will come on when
your anti-lock system is
adjusting brake pressure to
help avoid a braking skid.
See “Low Traction Light” in the Index.
Traction Control System (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning 01
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
LOW
TRACTION
This light will come on
when the traction control
system is limiting wheel
spin. See “Low Traction
Light” in the Index.
YOU may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in
the Index.)
4-9
This light should come
on briefly when you start
the engine. If it stays on
or comes on while you
are driving, there’s a
problem with your
traction control system.
-
,
,
,-.-I
c
C
C
l I
To turn the system off, press
the TCS symbol on thebottom of the button in the
center console switchbank.
The indicator light on the
traction control button will
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index, When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. (You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your
Vehicle” in the Index.)
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the indicator light will go off, but the system will
not turn off until there is no longer a current need to
limit wheel spin, You can turn the systemback on at any
time by pressing the button again. The traction control
system warning light should go off.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-10
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving onCurves
It’s importantto take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slowdown.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a childdarts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you
can stop in time, But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t
room. That’s the timefor evasive action -- steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies’’ earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the spaceavailable.
4-12
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it afull 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast,steer quickly, and
just as quicMy straighten the wheel onceyou have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible isa good reason to practice d’efensivedriving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves around thevehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
SLOW DOWN
edge of paved
SUT(BC0
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheelto go
straight down the roadway.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicleon a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrenderto frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driverface to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroadsfor situations that might affect your
passing patterns.If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better tim
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign upahead that might
indicate a turnor an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right
to pass (providing the road ahead
is clear). Never
cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if theroad seems empty of
approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicleyou
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, youwon’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
0
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-14
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s reviewwhat driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’thave enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.
In any emergency, don’tgive up. Keep tryingto
steer and constantly seekan escape route or area
of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a drivercan lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skidsare
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in ‘acurve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steerthe way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second slud ifit occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down andadjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues -- such as enoughwater, ice or packed
snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reasonis that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
4-16
No one can see as well at night as in thedaytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at leasttwice as much light to seethe
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, foryour eyes to readjust to thedark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out.Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even theinside of the glass
can build up afilm caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making thepupils of your eyescontract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps lightup farless of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour
eyes moving; that way, it’s easierto pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop,accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t asgood as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’thave much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.The
surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavierthe rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It's wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
4-18
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try tc, avoid puddles.
But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.
Wet b
I cancauseaccidents.Theywon't
work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until
your brakeswork normally,
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under yourtires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But itcan if your
tires do nothave much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
’ standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive
through them very slowly.
~
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
a Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as youwould for a
cross-country trip.
a Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See
the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
a Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before you
start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleareldthe intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch outfor
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the
freeway. If you have aclear view of the freeway asyou
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Tryto merge into the gap at closeto
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glanceover your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehiclein your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways)are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with trafficand keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passinglane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonablefollowing distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
4-21
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After drivingfor any distance
at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try tobe well rested. If you
must start whenyou’re not fresh -- such as aftera day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoesyou
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to
go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Pontiac dealerships all across North America, They’ll
be ready and willingto help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
a Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows cleaninside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have YOU checked
all levels?
4-22
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
I,
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid amajor storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a conditionas “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Callit
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with thehum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and the rushof the wind against
the vehcle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let
it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road
in less
than a second, and you could crashand be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Hill and MountainRoads
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercis'e,or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-23
I
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Coasting downkillin NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous, Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You wouldthen
have poorb r u g or even nonegoing down a hill.
You could crash.Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
Know how to go uphill.You may want to shift down
to a lower gear, The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better.
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poorbraking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engineassist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
I
4-24
e Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills OF mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of
special problems.Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area orwinding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bagof sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags tohelp
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
4-25
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
‘\\\
6
I
I
-
-
4-26
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or icecan be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt andsand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction
control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
If you don’t have traction control, accelerate gently. Try
not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would ondry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in.the Index.
0
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface ‘ofa curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
0 Turn on your hazard flashers.
a*
4-27
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but b’ecareful.
4-28
A
Snow cantrap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcomeyou and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it,so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open awindow just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s awayfrom thewind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run theengine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you getand it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only whenyou feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible.Preserve the
fuel as long as youcan. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle anddo some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
\SEE ~ N E R ’ MANUAL
S
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
1
I
The Certificatioflire label isfound on the rear edge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.
4-29
The CertificationPTire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the frontand rear axles, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual
loads onyour f i m t and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help youwith this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross
Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front
or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle
can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten the life
Q€
your vehicle.
4-30
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover partsor
components that fail becauseof overloading.
If you put things inside your vehide -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else-- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they'll keep going.
Electronic Level Control (Option)
Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike
a sudden stop or turn, or
and injure people in
in a crash.
Put things in the cargo areaof your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases,
inside thevehicle so’that some of them are
above the topsof the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever
you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou
need to.
On vehicles equipped with the optional electronic level
control, the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept
level as you load or unload your vehicle. However, you
should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
or unload your vehicle, and periodically as thesystem
self-adjusts. This isnormal.
The compressor should operate for brief periods of time.
If the sound continues for an extended period of time,
your vehicle needs service. To keep your battery from
being drained, you may want to pull the ELC fuse in the
fuse control panel until you can have your vehicle
serviced (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
4-31
Towing a Trailer
NOTICE:
If you don’t usethe correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously
injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followedall the
steps inthis section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
--
4-32
~
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. TO pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
~
~~
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’’
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work hardier
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
If You Do DecideTo Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
0 There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway ‘controlif your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh momre
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
0
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km)your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts’of your vehicle wear inat
the heavier loads.
a You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to,
a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating
your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer
will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of
your transaxle.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs. (630 kg)
with up to six occupants in the vehicle or more than
2,000 lbs. (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you
have the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle
can tow up to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with up to six
occupants or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to two
occupants. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on howyou plan to use your rig. For
exmple, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343-6008
4-34
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too, See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for moreinformation about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity,
Total Weighton Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
CertificatiodTire label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure
you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer,
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to them. Use onlya
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
4-35
Will you have tomake any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure toseal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and yourtrailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-36
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do nottry to tapinto
your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
=~
~
If you have a rear-most window open andyou
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO)could comeinto yourvehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in theIndex.) To
a trailer:
maximize your safety when towing
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on anyspeed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use
RECIRC because itonly recirculates the
air inside your vehicle. (See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.)
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand tobe sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-37
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal
well in advance.
You’ll need morepassing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And,because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Thrn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
When YOU tow a trailer, your vehicle has tohave
extra wiring.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left, To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Making f i m s
I
I NOTICE:
r-
Making very sharp turns while trailering
could
cause the trailer to come in conta’ct with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
4-38
I
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working,
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 kmk)to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs. (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in
THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
(or, as youneed to, a lower gear). This will minimize
heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your paking
brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-39
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
0 Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the traileris clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thecholcks.
4-40
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operati’onare automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering,it’s
a good idea to review these sections beforeyou start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitchnuts and bolts
are tight.
fi
NOTES
b
NOTES
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll findwhat to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-7
5- 12
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5 -22
5-22
5-23
5-32
5-33
If a Tire Goes Flat
Air Inflator (Option)
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare
Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning
flash'ers button is on top
of the steering column.
Press the button in toturn
on your flashers.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn't in.
To turn off the flashers, push the button down and it
will pop back up by itself.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police knowyou have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up
at the side of the road about 300 feet ( 100 m) b'ehind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may wantto use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps listed to
do itsafely.
On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding
door, a low voltage battery or replacing a battery may
cause the system to become inoperative. See “Power
Sliding Door” in the Index for more information.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps couldresult in costly damage
to your vehiclethat wouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
Trying tostart your vehicleby pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
1
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricityto
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or
all of these thingscan hurt you.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
5-3
To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transaxle inPARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlet. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locatethe batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
5-4
An electric fan canstart up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away
from any underhood
electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+)jump starting
terminal. The terminal is
under a tethered cap at the
front of the underhood fuse
and relay center. Pull up the
cap to access the remote
positive (+) terminal.
You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal
instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery.
-
Using a match near a battery can causebattery
gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if
you needmore light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom’
battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, besure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water
to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t getit on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with
water and get medicalhelp immediately.
~
Fans or othermoving engineparts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine isrunning.
5. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
5-5
Now connect the black
negative (-) cablle to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anythng until the
next step. The other end
of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead
battery. It goes toa heavy
unpainted metal part on
the engine of the vehicle
with the dead battery.
8.
9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
10. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries,it probably needs service.
11. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
Attach the cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not near engine
parts that move.
The electric’al
connection is just as
good there, but the
chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much less.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
€3. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-6
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing
1 A CAUTION:
service tow your vehicle. They can provide the right
equipment and know how to tow it without damage.
See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
If your vehcle has been changed or modified since
it was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like
fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels,
these things can bedamaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
0
When you call, tell the towing service:
0
0
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
0
Never let passengers ride in a vehiclethat
is being towed.
Never towfaster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow withdamaged parts not
fully secured.
Never getunder your vehicle after it has
been liftedby the tow truck.
Always useseparate safety chainson each
side when towing a vehicle.
Never useJ-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-7
NOTICE:
I
A vehicle canfall from a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. Thiscan cause a collision,
serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing,etc.) that can becut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-ho’ok slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
~
If you are using car-carrier equipment, you must
pull the Electronic LevelControl (ELC) fuse,in
the instrument panel fuse block, before
securing
the vehicle.
Damage to the shocks or leveling systemmay
occur if the Electronic LevelControl (ELC) fuse
is not disabled.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key in OFF. The steering wheel should be clamped
in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lock for this. For front towing, the
transaxle should be in PARK (P) and the parking brake
released. For rear towing, the transaxle should be in
NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake engaged.
NOTICE:
Front Towing
Tow Limits -- 55 mph (90 km/h), 500 miles (800 km)
Attach T-hook chains in the
front of the wheels, into the
front shipping brackets on
the frame (both sides).
Insert the hook from the
inward side of the slot, not
the outward side.
Your vehicle has front-wheel drive; do not have it
with the
towed with the front wheels contact
in
ground orvehicle damage mayoccur. A dolly
must be used under the front
wheels when towing
from therear or the vehicle must be transported
on a flat bed carrier.
.
~
.,
I
NOTICE:
Do not have yourvehicle towed with the front
wheels in contact with the ground. This
will
damage the transaxle.
If the vehicle must be towedon the frontwheels,
it cannot be towed more than
a total of 500 miles
(800 km) for the lifetime
of the vehicle.
NOTICE:
When attaching T-hooks to the shipping
slots in
the frame rail, attach them inside
of the frameto
avoid damage to the frame or front
fascia.
5-9
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or the
front bumper system willbe damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment, Use safety chainsand wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damagecan occur from
vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage, install a
towing dollyand raise the vehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground
and/or wheel-li€t equipment.
5-10
Rear Towing
A towing dolly must be used under the front wheels
when towing from the reax
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the rear
bumper system will be damaged.Use wheel-lift
or c a r carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chains andwheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfacescould
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage, installa
towing dolly and raise the
vehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground andlor
wheel-lift equipment.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage’’ in theIndex. You also have a low
coolant level light on your instrument panel. See “Low
Coolant Light” in the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Should an overheated engine condition exist, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of three cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you willnotice a significant loss in power
and engine performance. The low coolant light may
come on and the temperaturegage will indicate an
overheat condition exists.This emergency operating
mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe glace
in an emergency. Towinga trailer in the overheat
protection mode should be avoided.
5-12
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine
protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow
the engine tocool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be sev’erely
degraded. Repair
the causeof coolant loss and change the oil. See
‘(Engine Oil, Whento Change” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine canburn you
badly, evenif you just open the hood, Stay away
from the engineif you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from the vehicle untilit cools down. Wait until
there is no signof steam or coolant before you
open the hood,
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids init can catch fire.You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine iscool.
5-13
I NOTICE:
~
If your engine catchesfire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged.The costly repairs wouldnot be
covered by your warranty. See ‘‘Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”in the Index.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
5-14
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
2. Turn on your heater to fullhot at the highest fan
speed and openthe window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highestgear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you
can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and par? ; r
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine for
two or three minutes while you’re parked, see
to if the
warning stops. But then,if you still have the warning,turn
oflthe engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but toget service
help right away.
~
~
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
start up even when the engine is
not running and
can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
5-15
.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
MOT mark.
5-16
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. D’on’t touch them.
If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine,it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an enginefire, and you couldbe burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak,with the engine on, check
to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the
engine isoverheating, both fansshould be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant
level isn’t at or above the FULL HOT mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled)
and [email protected] coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index
for more information.)
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol, canboil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper
coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
too hot butyou wouldn’t
your engine could get
get the overheat warning.Your engine could
catch fire andyou or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-17
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or
above the FULL HOT mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there's one more
thing you can try. You can ad'd the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before y'ou do it.
-I
,ACAUTION:
-,.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn youbadly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can comeout
at high speed.Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, includingthe radiatorpressure
cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and the
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto
turn thepressure cap.
--
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it willburn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don't spill coolant ona hot engine.
5-18
--
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot,
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning
the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-19
2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap,
5-20
3. Fill the radiator with the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, up to the baseof the fillerneck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Indexfor more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)
4. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
5 . By this time, thecoolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
6. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure ifcoolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Besure the
arrows on the pressure cap lineup like this.
more ofthe proper [email protected] mixture
through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-21
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tiresafely.
7. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
HOT mark.
8. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.
If a Tire Goes Plat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially ifyou maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leakout slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
5-22
Air Inflator (Option)
Your vehicle may have an air inflator used to bring tires
up to the proper pressure. See “Accessory Inflator
System” in the Index for more details.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goesflat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle
can slipoff the jack and
roll over youor other
people. You and they could be badlyinjured.
To help
Find a level place to change your tire.
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever PARK
in
(P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be evenmore certain thevehicle won't move,
you can put blocksat the front and rear
of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side
of the
vehicle, at theopposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-23
Removing the Spare Tire and Tu&
The equipment you’ll
need i s in thestorage
compartment at the rear
o’fthe vehicle, on the
passenger’s side.
I
Remove the side convenience nets. Open the jack
storage compartment bmy lifting up the tab and pulling
the cover off.
5-24
JACK & TOOL STORAGE
Remove the jack and jacking tools by loosening the
wing nut andbracket,
Separate the plastic
pouch from the jack and remove the
jacking tools (folding wrench and shaft) from the pouch.
$T SHAFT
\
HOIST
/ ASSEMBLY
4-
P
I
WRENCH
/
EXTENSION
(CHISEL END)
SPARE TIRE IS STORED UNDER
REAR COMPARTMENT FLOOR
(VALVE STEM DOWN)
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper. Insert the narrow end of the
shaft into thehole above the rear bumper. Then attach
the folding wrench to the shaft.
Rotate the folding wrench to the left to lower the
compact spare tire until it canbe pulled from under
the vehicle.
Slide the cable retainer through the center of the spare,
then place the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you’ll be using include the jlack (A), shaft (B)
and folding wrench (C).
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, use the handle
of the folding wrench to pry the large center cap off.
Then, with the otherend of the wrench, loosen
the nuts.
5-26
2. If your vehicle has the plastic “bolt-on” wheel
covers, you cannot separate the nylon wheel nut caps
from the cover. Loosen them completely using the
folding wrench, and remove the wheel cover. If the
wheel nut caps have been completely loosened, the
wheel cover will come off easily.
3. Loosen the wheel
nuts -- but donot
remove them -- using
the folding wrench.
(Turn the handle about
180 degrees, then flip
the handle back to the
starting position. This
avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut
for each turn.)
4. Near each wheel,
there is a notch in
the vehicle's body.
Position thejack
and raise the jack
head until it fits
firmly into the
notch in the
vehicle's frame
nearest the flat tire.
NOTICE:
Do not place the jack under the rear axle
control arms.Only use the areas shown for
proper jack location.
Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
5-27
5. Attach the folding
wrench to the jack, and
rotate the wrench to the
right to raise the jack
head a few inches.
Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you
could be badlyinjured or killed, Never getunder
a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.
6 . Raise the vehicle by rotating the folding wrench to
the right in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
Raising your vehicle withthe jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage,be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5-28
to fit.
7. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come
loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Install the spare tire and replace the wheel nuts with
the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub.
I
Rust or dirt on the
wheel, or on the parts towhich
it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become
loose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
places wherethe
remove anyrust or dirt from the
wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but
be sure touse a scraper orwire brush later,if you
need to, to getall the rust ordirt off.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a criss-cross
sequence, as shown.
10. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel
wrench to the jack and rotating the wrench to the
left. Lower the jack completely.
5-30
Incorrect wheelnuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts' can cause the wheel
to become loose
and even clomeoff. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft
(140 Nom).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t tryto put a wheelcover on the compact spare tire.
It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in therear of
the vehicle until youhave the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel coverswon’t fit on your compact spare.
If
you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage thecover or the spare.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
I
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury.In a sudden stopor collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the properplace.
Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem down. Remove the small center cap by tapping the
back of the cap with the extension of the shaft. Slide the
cable retainer through thecenter of the wheel and start
to raise the tire. When thetire is almost in the stored
position, turn the tireso the valve is towards therear of
the vehicle. This will help when you check and maintain
tire pressure in the spare.
Keep raising the wheel until you hear the hoist
mechanism click twice. This means the wheel is
firmly stored against theunderside of the vehicle.
Push against the wheel to be sure it does not move
and is stored securely.
5-31
Unless you have the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, be
sure to also store the center cap.When you replace the
compact spare with a full-size tire, replace the bolt-on
wheel covers and thecenter cap. Tighten them “hand
tight” over the wheel nuts, usingthe folding wrench.
BAG &
TOOLS
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a
time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 E a ) .
NOTE:
INSTALL.BOTTOM
OF BAG
I
’
JACK
-w
TOOL STORAGE
Replace all jacking tools as they were stored inthe jack
storage compartment andreplace the compartment
cover. To replace the cover, line up the tabson the right
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the
cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests in
the groove. This secures the cover in place.
5-32
Compact Spare Tire
After installing the compact spare onyour vehicle,
you should stopas soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated, The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 h),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuckis
to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must usecaution.
When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake
your vehiclethrough an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compactspare canget caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
I
Don’t useyour compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’tmix your compact spare tire or wheelwith
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chainswon’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use
tire chains on your
compact spare.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan
explode, and you or otherscould beinjured. And,
the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fire or otherdamage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above35 mph (55 krn/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-33
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
NOTICE:
~
I
I
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your
vehicle as well as
the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shiftingyour transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
5-34
First, turn your steering wheel left and right, That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turnyour traction
control system off. (See “Traction Control System” in
the Index.) Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal
when the transaxleis in gear, If that doesn’t get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you
do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
b
NOTES
5-35
@bNOTES
5-36
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-7
6- 8
6-11
6- 15
6- 17
6- 18
6-21
6-24
6-26
6-27
6-30
6-3 1
6-39
Service
Fuel
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter Replacement
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6-40
6-48
6-48
6-52
6-55
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-66
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-67
6-67
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications
Vehicle Dimensions
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants youto
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to dosome of your own service work, you’ll
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
-Genuine
6-2
want to use theproper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work,see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record withall parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
Fuel
You can be injured and your
vehicle could be
damaged if you try todo service work ona
vehicle without knowing enough about
it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any
vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners.“English’? and “metric”
fasteners can beeasily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or falloff. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D4814 in the United Statesand CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability
and emission control system protection compared to
other gasolines.
Be sure theposted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s badenough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re usingfuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear alittle pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy,constant knock that means
you have a problem.
6-3
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorilyon fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument pan'el may turnon and/or
your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. If this occurs,
return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis
to determinethe cause of failure, In the event it is
determined that the causeof the condition is the type'of
fuels used, repairsmay not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions contain an o'ctane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not
his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recornmend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark pluglife may be reducedand your emission
control system performancemay be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp onyour instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Pontiac dealer for service.
6-4
To provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you shouldnot haveto
add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area to
help clean theair. General M'otors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
r
NOTICE:
Your vehicle wasnot designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don'tuse it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system andalso damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't
be covered underyour warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use ofimproper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Filling YourTank
When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual
sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will only
open partway.
Gasoline vaporis highly flammable. It
burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
If you get gasolineon yourself and then
something ignitesit, you could be badlyburned.
Gasoline c’anspray out on you if youopen the
fuel fillercap too quickly. Thisspray canhappen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Openthe fuel filler cap slowly and
wait €or any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible.See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
hook on the filler door hinge, or let thecap hang by the
tether as shown.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it willspring back to the right.
6-6
When you put the cap back on, turn it tothe right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been le&off or
improperly installed. This would allc&fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
NOTICE:
~
/’
~~~~~
If you needa new cap, be sure to getthe right
type, Your dealer can get one for you, If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system maybe
damaged. See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Never fill aportable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignitethe gasoline vapor.You can
be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoidinjury to youand others:
Dispense gasoline onlyinto approved
containers.
0
0
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on anysurface other than theground.
Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the
inside of the fill opening beforeoperating
the nozzle. Contact should bemaintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under the Hood
An electric fan under thehood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothingand tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Things that burncan get on hot engine
parts and
start a fire. These includeliquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washerand
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could beburned, Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
1
To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle
inside the vehicle.
Pull forward on the hood
prop to release it from its
storage clip. Then put the
end of the hood propinto
the slot in the underside of
the hood.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and push up on the
underhood release.
Lift the hood.
The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine
temperatures under the hood, so be careful when
handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when handling
the hood prop.
6-9
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:
4
A. Underhood Fuse and
Relay Center
€3. Remote Positive (+)
Battery Terminal
C. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir
6-10
D. Radiator Pressure Cap
E. Power Steering
Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Oil Fill Location
G. Engine Oil Dipstick
H, Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
I. Brake Master Cylinder
J. Air Cleaner
K. Engine Coolant Reservoir
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Thenjust letthe
hood down and close it firmly.
It’s a good idea tocheck your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Underhood Lamp (If Equipped)
Your underhood lamp will go on when you open
the hood.
Engine Oil
OIL
LEVEL
If the OIL LEVEL light
on the instrument panel
comes on, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see “Low Oil Level Light” in the
Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
The engine oil dipstick is located at thefront of
the engine compkment, near the center. The
dipstick handle has a bright, yellow loop design for
easy identification.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-11
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstickand clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your enginehas so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area thatshows the proper
operating range,your engine could be damaged.
~.
~
The engine oil fillcap is
located justbehind the
engine oil dipstick.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil isat or belowthe ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway
back in when you’re through.
6-12
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use anyoil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own
oil, be sure you use oil
that has the Starburst
symbol on the front of the
oil container. If you have
your oil changed for you,
be sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
7
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
SAE 5W-30
PREFERRED
/
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-13
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best foryour
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going
to be 0°F (-1 8’C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 2OW-50,
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anythng to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short tripkity
maintenance schedule:
NOTICE:
0
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not coveredby your warranty.
--
-
Mos’ttrips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 14 krn).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing,
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
GM Goodwrench’ oil meets all the requirements €or
your vehicle.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application,
6-14
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break dawn sooner. If any one of these istrue €or your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 k
r
r
a
)or 3 months -- whichever
08ccursfirst.
If none ofthem is true, use the long triphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
Air Cleaner
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
el’ements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin andcould
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own Oil, be Sure to drain all free-flowing Oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it inthe trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service stationor a local recycling
center for help.
The air cleaner is located at the front of the engine
compartment (on the driver’s side of the vehicle), under
the engine coolant reservoir.
6-15
Checking or Replacing the Air Cleaner
1. Unlatch thetwo hooks on top of the air
cleaner housing.
2. Turn back the air inletpanel and rest it on top
of the housing, Theair intake tube is designed to
flex back; you do not need to disconnect it.
3. After replacing the air cleaner filter, seat the tabs on
the bottom of the panel into theslots at the bottom.
4. Latch the hooks to secure thepanel in place. If the
panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated
correctly in theslots.
U
Operallllg the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working onthe engine with
the air cleaner off.
-
6-16
If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And,
dirt can easily get
into your engine, which willdamage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter Replacement
Passenger compartment air, both outside airand
recirculated air,is routed through a passenger
compartment filter, which is part of a two-piece filter
system. The filter removes certain contaminants from
the air, including pollen and dust particles. Reductions
in airflow, whichmay occur more quicklyin dusty
areas, indicatethat the filter needs to
be replaced early.
For how often to change the air filter, see “Maintenance
Schedule’’ in the Index.
The access panel for the air filter is inthe back of the
glove box.
1. Pull the tab up and out on the outer access panel.
access panel.
6-17
3. The first air filterwill pull straight out. To remove
the second, reachin and slide it toward the opening.
Pull the second filterout.
4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make sure
the filters are inserted so that the sealing foam is
angled in the same direction
on both filters. For the
Maintenance
type of filter to use, see “Normal
Replacement Parts” in the Index.
5. Close the inner access door, while squeezing the tab,
to be sure it is tightly closed.
6 , Snap the outer access panel into the back of the
glove box.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oilis changed.
Change both the fluidand filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32”C) or higher.
e In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailertowing.
Uses such as found in taxi, policeor delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluidand filter do not require changing.
S’ee“Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index,
6-18
How to Check
0
While pulling a trailer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, oryou could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading you
if check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have beendriving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32" C).
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180O F to 200 OF
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warrned up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO°C), you may
have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
0
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
At high speed for quite a while.
6-19
Then, without shutting off the engine,follow
these steps:
1. The dipstick is locatedtoward the back of the engine
compartment, next to the brake master cylinder.
The dipstick has a bright red loop 'design €or easy
identification. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all theway, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-20
3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the
lower level. The fluidlevel must bein the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid levelis in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick,
~
1. out
Pull
~~
~
Engine Coolant
~~
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
8
the dipstick.
ktnb
(240 000
whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you havea
problem with engine overheating, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring to
it the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected], because fluid with that label
is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
A 50/50 mixture of water and [email protected]
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
~
Give boiling protection up to 265 “F (129 ” C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
6-21
What to Use
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
1
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half [email protected]’coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important thatyou use
only DEX-COOL~(silicate-free) coolant,
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system,premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
90,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occursfirst. Damage causedby the
use of coolant other than [email protected] not
covered by your new vehiclewarranty.
--
6-22
’A
1
CAUTION:
g-p*,::s
&[email protected]$
i.5: .2,
x1
Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol,can bsoil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set €or the propercoolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too
hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could beburned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
I
Checking Coolant
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheatand be badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
The engine coolant reservoir is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle, above the air cleaner.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,
you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which
claim to
improve thesystem. These can be harmful.
I
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should
be at FULL COLD, or a little higher. When your
engine is warm, the level should be up to FULL HOT,
or a little higher.
6-23
If this light comes on, it
means you’re low on
engine coolant.
1
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on
a hot engine.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
lbrning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiatorare hot can allowsteam and
scalding liquidsto blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recoverytank, you will almost
never haveto add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engineand radiator are hot.
--
I-
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
6-24
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105Wa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed
to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine
damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows
on the cap line up with the overflow tube on
the radiator filler neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure cap, a GM cap
is recommended.
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system
or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
When you replace your thermostat, a GM thermostat
is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Thenremove the cap again and
lo’okat the fluid level on the dipstick.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should
be at the H mark. When it’s cold, the level should be at
the C mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should
add fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located to theright
of the windshield washer fluid reservoir, at the back of
the engine compartment.
6-25
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle, near the
fuse and relay center.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tank is full.
6-26
NOTICE:
e When usingconcentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
e Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold.This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which coulddamage the tank if it is
completely full.
e Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)in
your windshield washer.It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct leak.
a
If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have toomuch
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the
fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid
is leaking out of the brake system.If it is, you should
1
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
6-27
BRAKE
United States
Canadian
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light. will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, useonly DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11* (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
6-28
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even workat all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll haveto be
replaced. Don’t let someone
put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spillbrake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, washit off
immediately, See “Appearance Carepsin
the Index.
~
Brake Wear
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nutsin the
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make proper sequence to GM specifications.
a high-pitched warning sound when
the brake pads are
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and
if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
go or be heard all the timeyour vehicle is moving (except
rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also,the rear
when you arepushine on the brake pedal firmly).
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
I
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of
this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
NOTICE:
Brake Pedal Travel
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads
could result in costly brake repair.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
~~-
~
~
~
~
~~~
~~
~
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you applythe brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
6-29
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehiclle Storage
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex.
Its many parts haveto be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicleis to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. Whenyou replace parts of your braking
system -- for example,when your brake liningswear
down and youhave to have new ones put in-- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for you- vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for theworsle. The bralcing
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
If you’re not going to drive yourvehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
Battery
Every newPontiac has an ACDelco Freedom* battery.
You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco
Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement
number shown on the originalbattery’s label.
6-30
sunning down.
~
Batteries have acid that can
burn you and gas
that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Jump Starting
Headlamps
For jump starting instructions,see “Jump Starting”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Bulb Replacement
When replacing the headlamp bulb,
do not leave
the bulb out for any length
of time. This could
cause nitrogengas to escape from the
bulb. To
minimize nitrogen gas from escaping within the
headlamp, the headlamp must be
placed on a flat
surface with the lens facing down
when removing
the bulb.
For the type of bulbs, see“Replacement Bulbs” in
the Index.
Halogen Bulbs
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and
bulb. You or
can burstif you drop or scratch the
others couldbe injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
1
1. Ope
ne hood.
2. Remove the front parking/turn signallamp assembly.
See “Front ParlungKurn Signal Lamps” later in
this section.
6-31
3. Remove the two wing nuts located on top of the
headlamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb assembly straight up from the
lamp housing.
4. Unscrew the black retainer ring that holds the bulb
assembly in place.
6. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the
blue tabs and pulling the bulb out.
6-32
7. Replace the new bulb through the black retainer ring
and into the electrical connector. Push the bulb
firmly enough so that the blue tabs hook over the tab
on the bulb.
8. Carefully put the bulb assembly back into the lamp
housing and tighten the black retainer ring in place.
Be careful not to damage the bulb on the headlamp
aiming bar.
6-33
Front Parking/'km Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
9. Align the pins on the bottom of the headlamp
assembly with the holes inthe lamp support bracket
while placing the holes in the assembly over the
bolts where the wing nuts attach.
10. Replace and tighten the wing nuts.
11. Replace the parlung/turn signal lamp assembly by
lining up the tabs at the back of the assembly with
the holes in the fender.
12. Tighten the bolt connecting the parking/turn signal
lamp assembly. Be sure the tab from the
parking/turn signal lamp assembly is inboard of the
tab from the headlamp assembly.
6-34
2. Remove the thumb screw attaching the parkinglturn
signal lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the parkinghrn signal lamp assembly away
from the^ body.
4. Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assembly by
pressing the tab while turningto the left.
5. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and
gently pushing the new one into the lamp socket.
6. Line up the tabs on the socket with the gaps in the
socket holes and screw the bulb socket back into the
lamp housing until an audible click is heard (the tab
popping back out).
7 . To replace the lamp assembly, line up and insert
the tabs on the back of the assembly with the slots
in the fender. Engage the lower clip onthe front of
the lamp assembly, keeping the upper tab on the
parking/turn signal lamp assembly inboard of the
headlamp bracket tab.
8. To align the parking/turn signal lamp assembly with
the headlamp assembly, lift up the parking/turn
signal lamp assembly until the upper edge is
contacting the fender.
3. Fasten the parking/turn signal lamp assembly to the
headlamp assembly with the thumb screw removed
in Step 1.
6-35
Front Sidemarker
1. Open the hood.
5. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and
gently pushing the new one into the lampsocket.
2. Remove the thumb screw attaching the parkinghrn
signal lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the parking/turn signal lamp assembly away
from the body.
4, Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assembly by
turning it to the left.
6-36
6. Line up the tabs on the socket with the gaps in the
socket holes and screw the bulb socket back into
the lamp housing.
8. To align the parking/turn signal lamp assembly with
the headlamp assembly, lift up the parking/turn
signal lamp assembly until the upper edge is
contacting the fender.
9. Fasten the parkinglturn signal lamp assembly to the
headlamp assembly with the thumb screw removed
in Step 1.
Taillamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing
on the inboard side.
7. To replace the lamp assembly, line up and insert
the tabs on the back of the assembly with the slots
in the fender. Engage the lower clip on the front of
the lamp assembly, keeping the upper tab on the
parking/turn signal lamp assembly inboard of the
headlamp bracket tab.
3. Pull off the entire taillamp housing. The
locatorlretaining pins on the outboard side are
part of the lamp assembly and will remain intact
during removal.
6-37
E
4. Remove the bulb holder by pressing the four
retaining tabs andpulling the holder awayfrom
the assembly.
5 . Replace the bulb(s) by pulling the old one(s>out
and gently pushing the new one(s) into the bulb
holder socket.
6-38
BulbA. Tail
B. Back-up Bulb
C. Turn Signal Bulb
D. Stop/Tail Bulb
6. Snap the bulb holder back into place making sure all
retaining tabs are properly over the bulb holder tabs.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the
outboard locatingh-etaining pins until the lamp is
seated. Secure with the inboard screws.
For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this
section, contact your dealerservice department.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
For the proper windshield wiper blade length and type,
see “Replacement Parts” in the Index.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the
type with a release clip:
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wipe pattern. The blades are
more accessible for removalheplacement while in
this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield or backglass.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the blade assembly down
toward the glass to removeit from the wiper arm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm
until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
6-39
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by
a leadingtire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see
your Pontiac Warranty bookletfor details.
I
Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-40
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure shouldbe checked
when your tiresare cold.
Overinflated tires are morelikely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as whenyou hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your
tread is badly worn, iforyour tires have
been damaged, replace them,
--
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
NOTICE: (Continued)
The GertificatiordTire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires whenthey’re cold, “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If your tires have too muchair (overinflation),
you can getthe following:
0 Unusualwear
0 Bad handling
Rough ride
0 Needless damagefrom road hazards.
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you
that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 P a ) .
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell ifyour tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
~~
6-41
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check fordamaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is toachieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-42
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and sea inflation pressures as shown on the
CertificatiodTire label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut
Torque” in the Index.
I
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel
nuts become loose
after a t h e . The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency,you can
use a cloth or a pager towel to do this; be
but
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to,to get all the rust or dirt off. (See
(‘Changinga Flat Tire”in the Index.)
When It’s Time forNew Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0
The tire has a puncture, cut or other darnage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,look at
the Certificatioflire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get newtires,
get ones with that same TPC Specnumber. Thatway
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-43
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Mixing tires couldcause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have
a crash,
Using tires of different sizes may alsocause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It's all right to drivewith your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could developcracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-44
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim 'diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
-- A, B, C
Treadwear
Temperature
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and maydepart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction -- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B,
and C , and they represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning) traction.
6-45
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancingare
not needed. However,if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment mayneed to be reset.If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
Pontiac model.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheelthat is bent, cracked, or badly rustea
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should bereplaced, If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your
dealer if anyof these conditions exist.
Your dealer will h o w the kind of wheel you need.
6-46
Using thewrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle,make your tireslose
air and make youlose control. You could have a
collision inwhich you orothers could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts and
wheel nutsfor replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometeror
odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or
tire chain clearanceto thebody and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
ent P’“zels
Tire Chains
I NOTICE:
Use tire chainsonly where legal and only when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
tires. Install
that are the proper size for your
them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the endssecurely
fastened. Drive slowly andfollow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.If you canhear
the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop and
retighten them.If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving
too fast or
spinning thewheels with chains onwill
damage yourvehicle.
Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and causea n accident. If you have to replacea
wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel.
6-47
Appearance Care
0
Lacquer Thinner
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flameif you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure tofollow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows whenyou’re cleaning the inside.
0
Nail Polish Remover
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
0 Gasoline
0
Benzene
0
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Acetone
a Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
6-48
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0 Alcohol
0
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to getrid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, pastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. Asoft brush may be used if
stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediatelyor it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brushthe area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply witha clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use asponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice,milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose
interior cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of balung soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4.Let
dry.
Stains caused by candy,ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-49
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning the Tup of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of th'e instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
a Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don't get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and avinyvleather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Cleaning Leather
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and amild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Cleaning the Built-in Child
Restraint Pad
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
@
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-50
The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the seat
frame with fastener strips. You can remove the pad
and hand wash it with mild soap and water,
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint Harness
Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint
harness c k n 2nd dry.
window, since they may have tobe scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across
the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
Do not bleach or dye safety belts
or the built-in
child restraint harness. If you do, they may
be
severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be
able to provide adequate protection. Clean the
safety belts and the child restraint harness only
with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon [email protected] (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you
rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stickto the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.Apply
silicone grease with a clean clothat least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants’’in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish onyour vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
6-52
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to
dry on the surface, or
they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towelto
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Before you enter an automatic car wash, if your vehicle
is equipped with the optional power sliding door, be sure
to have the switch for thepower sliding door override
feature enabled. See “Power Sliding Door” in the Index.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lampshenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle
by hand maybe necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning
products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care
and Materials” in the Index.)
Your vehicle has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes
that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcogt
paint finish.
I NOTICE:
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning AluminumWheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A
wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you
could damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tir’ecleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
6-53
Cleaning '-- -!s
To clean your tires, 1
-
-: a
Sheet Metal Damage
stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaceson the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish.
6-54
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust systemeven though they have
corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaceson your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
At least everyspring, flush these materialsfrom the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and other debris cancollect. Dirt packed in closed
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac
will repair, atno charge to the owner,the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-55
Appearance Care Materials Chart
USAGE
PART DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
SIZE
994954
23 in. x 25 in.
1050172
16 oz. (0.473 L)
1050173
16 oz. (0.473 L)
1050174
16 oz. (0.473 L)
I
1050214
I 32 oz. (0.946 L)
1050427
I 23 oz. (0.680 L)
1052870
~
I
Polishing Cloth - Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
I
I
Vinyl
Cleaner
I
Glass
Cleaner
I
I
I
I
I
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Useon chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans
vinyl tops,
- upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Cleans and lightly waxes
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinvl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils
Cleans and shines a variety of surface types
5
1
1052918**
1052925
1052929
1052930
12345002
6-56
I
1
8
OZ.
(0.237 L)
1
1
Armor All” Protectant
Multi-Purpose Interior
and
Cleaner
Wheel Cleaner
16-oz. (0.473 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
oz.8
(0.237 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Armor All” Cleaner
16 oz. (0.473 L)
I
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the access panel
located on the driver’s side of the rear of the vehicle. It’s
very helpful if youever need to order parts. On this
label is:
yourVIN,
CODE
MODEL YEAR
PLANT
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certificationand Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
themodeldesignation,
paintinformationand
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN isthe engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
6-57
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by aninternal circuit
breaker in the UP fuse panel. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps to go on and off, or insome casesto
remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
I NOTICE:
~
i
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first.
Some
electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working
as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electricalto your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle”in the Index.
6-58
I
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motoris protected by an internal
circuit breaker anda fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the I/P fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
sh'ortcircuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible therrnal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a badfuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel
fuse block is to the right
of the glove box. Pull the
door open toaccess the
instrument panel fuse block.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don't have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage oruse one of the spare fuses in the underhood
fuse and relay center.Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can getalong without -- like the radio
or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the right
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the
instrument panel fuse block and the underhood fuse
and relay center.
6-59
Circuit Breakers
PWR SEATPSD
CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
6-Way Power Seat(s)
and Rear Side DoorActuator
Motor
FRT HVACMI BLWR Blower Motor Hi Speed
Relay in Module
Fuses
SWC BACKLIGHT
PWR WDO/RR
VENT
PWR SEAT/
FRT HVAClHl
I
I
I
ELEC FRNDL
Instrument Cluster to
PRNDL Indicators
PWR MIRROR
Power Remute Control
Mirror Switch
CRUISE
Cruise Control Module,
Switch and Release Switch
PWR QTR VENT
Interior Lampsand
Multifunction Switch
(Power Vent Switch)
FRT W P W S H R
Windshield Wipermasher
Motor and Switch
BCM
For More Information, See Owner's Manual
Circuit Breakers
HEADLAMP
DRL Control Module,
Headlamp and I/F
Dimmer Switch
PWR WDO/RR VENT Front Power Windows
PWR LUCK
6-60
Steering Wheel Radio
Control Switches
(Illumination)
Fuses
Fuses
RH T/LP
Not Used
RR FOG LP
Not Used
CIGAWDLC
Cigarette Lighter and Data
Link Connector (DLC)
TfSIG
Turn Signal Switch
RR HVAC
Rear Blower Motor, Rear
Heater-A/C Control,
and Temperature Door
Actuator (Rear)
SWC ACCY
Steering Wheel Radio
Control Switches
Turn Signal Switch
HAZARD
RR PWR SCKT
Rear Electric Accessory
Plug Housing
DRL
DRL Control Module
LH TLP
Not Used
FW DEFOG
Rear Window
Defogger Relay
FRT PWR SCKT
Front Electric Accessory
Plug Housing
SIR
Inflatable Restraint
Control Module
FRT HVAC
LOWMED BLWR
Heater-A/C Control
MALL/RADIO/DIC
BCM, Driver Information
Display, Radio and Radio
Rear Speaker Amplifier
STOP LAMP
Stoplamp Switch
to Stoplamps
Electronic Brake Control
ModuleElectronic Brake
Traction Control Module
(EBCMRBTCM)
ABS MOD BATT
CAN VENT SOL
Evaporative Emissions
(EVAP) Canister Vent
Solonoid Valve
ELC
Electronic Level Control
(ELC) Air Compressor
and ELC Relay, Trailer
Harness
6-61
Fuses
Fuses
CTSY LAMP
BCM
LH HEADLP LOW
Not Used
IGN 1
ALC Sensor, BCM,
Electronic Brake Control
Indicator Lamp Driver
Module, Instrument Panel
Cluster, Rear Side Door
Actuator Motor, Rear
Window Wipermasher and
Multifunction Switch (Fog
Lamp SwitcldTraction
Control Switch) and
Stoplampflorque Converter
Clutch (TCC) Switch
LH HEADLP HIGH
Not Used
ABS/TCS IGN
Electronic Brake Control
ModuleElectronic Brake
Traction Control Module
(EBCMIEBTCM)
ABS SOL
LH and RH Front Brake
Solenoid Valve
HVACDRL
Air Inlet Actuator, DRL
SUNROOF
Sunroof Control Module
RR WPR WSHR
Rear Window Wip'erMotor,
Rear Window Wipermasher
and Multifunction Switch
(Rear Window
Wipermasher Switch)
6-62
Control Module, Heater-A/C
Control, Temperature Door
Actuator (Front) and Rear
Window Defogger Relay
BCM PRGRM
Body Control
Module (BCM)
RH HEADLP LOW
Not Used
RH HEADLP HIGH
Not Used
PCM
IGN MAIN Relay and PCM
Underhood Fuseand Relay Center
This fuse and relay center is locatedin the engine
compartment, in front of the windshield washer
fluid reservoir.
Maxi Fuse
1-COOL FAN 2
Coolant Fans
T’he fuses marked spare are available if a replacement
fuse isneeded.
3-HEADLAMPS
Circuit Breakers: FRT W A C HI
BLWR, and HEADLAMP Fuses
(W): HAZARD and STOPLAMP
4-BATT MAIN 2
Circuit Breaker: PWR
SEAT/PSD. Fuses (UP):ELC
and RR DEFOG
6-63
Mini Relays
Maxi Fuse
9-COOL FAN
RHFANl,LHFAN2
10-COOL FAN 2
LH FAN 2
11-IGN MAIN
FUSES: A/C CLU, IGN l-UM,
INS, ELEK IGN, TCC
Ignition Switch to Fuses (UP):
ABS/TCS IGN, CRUISE, DRL,
ELEC PRNDL, IGN 1, PSD,
SIR, T/SIGand PCM [IGN
MAIN Relay (Uaderhsod
Electrical Center Fuses: A/C
CLU, ELEK IGN, IGN l-U/H,
INJ, TCC)]
Micro Re1ay:s
6-COOL FAN 1
CoolantFans
13-NC CLU
A/C Clutch
7-BATT MAIN I
Fuses (UP):ABS MOD BATT,
CIGAE2/RLC, CTSY LAMP,
FRT PWR SCKT, PWR
LOCK, PWR MIRROR and
RR PWR SCKT
P 4 - W L PUMP
Fuel Pump
15-FPMP SPD
Not Used
5-IGN MAIN 1
8-IGN MAIN 2
6-64
Ignition Switch to Fuses (VP):
BCM PRGWM, FRT HVAC
LOWMED BLWR, FXT
WPFUWSHR, HVACDRL,
MALLIRARIOIDIC, PWR
QRT VENT, RR HVAC, RR
wPR/WSHR, SUNROOF,
SWC ACCY and PWR WD8
Circuit Breaker
RHFANI,LHFAN2
CONT
16-HORN
17-FOG LAMB
LH Fog Lamp, RH Fog Lamp,
Fog Lamp Indicator
Mini Fuse
18-INJ
Fuel Injectors 1-6
19-SPARE
Not Used
2O-SPARE
Not Used
Mini Fuse
21-IGN1-UH
Mini Fuse
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)
Canister Purge Valve, Heated
Oxygen Sensors 1 and 2,Mass
Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
30-ALT SENSE
Generator
3 1-TCC
Automatic Transaxle (Torque
Converter Clutch Solenoids)
Stoplamp Switch to PCM
32-FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay
33-ECM SENSE
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
22-SPARE
Not Used
23-SPARE
Not Used
24-SPARE
Not Used
25-ELEK IGN
Ignition Control Module (ICM)
34
Not Used
26-SPARE
Not Used
35-FOG LP
Fog Lamp Relay
27-B/U LAMP
Transaxle Range Switch to
Back-up Lamps
36-HORN
Horn Relay
37-PARK LP
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Control Module, Headlamps
and U P Dimmer Switch
Theft-Deterrent Relay
to Headlamps
38
Not Used
39
Not Used
40
Mini Fuse PuIIer
28-A/C CLU
A/C CLU Relay to A/C
Compressor Clutch Oil
29-RADIO
Driver Information Display,
Heater A/C Control, Radio, Rear
Side Door Actuator Control
Motor, Remote Control Door
Lock Receiver (RCDLR),
Security Indicator Lamp and
Theft Deterrent Shock Sensor
6-65
-
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
NumberBulb
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9004-HBI
Front ParkinglTurn
SignalLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .3157 NA or 3157 NAK
Front Sidemarker Lamps . .
. . . . . . . . 194
. . . . . . . . . . 3057
Stop/Tail (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 3156
Signal ‘(2ndfrom top) . . . . . . .
Back-up Lamps (3rd from top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 156
Tail
(Bottom)
......................
. 3057
~
.
.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given In
English and metric conversions.
Please refer to“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
Engine Crankcase Oil and
Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts’(4.3 L)
Fuel Capacity
StandardRegular . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 gallons (76 L)
OptionaUExtended . . . . . . . . . . . .25 gallons (95 L)
Refrigerant, Air Conditioning* . , , See Refrigerant
Label under the hood.
Tire Pressures, Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . See Tire-Loading
Information label on driver’s door.
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N m )
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . 1 gallon (0.37 L)
*See Air Conditioning Refrigerantslater in this section.
NOTE: All capaciti’esare approximate. When adding,
be sure to fill to the appropriatelevel, as recornended
in this manual.
~
Cooling System
With A K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 quarts (9.1 L)
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code ....................
... E
EngineType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V6
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 1-2-3-4-5-6
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
With Rear Climate Controlor
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 quarts (11.3 L)
Thermostat Temperature
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195°F(91°C)
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . 8 quarts (7.5 L)
6-66
,
-
Vehicle Dimensions Regular Wheel Base
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187.3 inches (475.8 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.7 inches (1 84.7 cm)
. . . 67.4 inches (171.2 cm)
Height . . .
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 inches (284.5 cm)
Front Tread Width . . . . . . . 61.5 inches (156.2 cm)
Rear Tread Width . . . . . . . . . . 63.3 inches (160.8 cm)
I
.
.
Vehicle Dimensions - Extended Wheel Base
Length . .
. . 201.3 inches (511.4 cm)
Width . . .
. 72.7 inches (184.7 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.1 inches (172.9 cm)
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 inches (304.7 cm)
Front Tread Width . . . . . . . 6 1.5 inches (1 56.2 cm)
. . . 63.3 inches (160.8 cm)
Rear TreadWidth . . .
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A-1208C
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (2) . . . . 52470574
PF47
Engine Oil Filter ........................
Spark Plugs . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . AC Type4 1-940
Gap: 0.060 inches (1.5 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
24 inches (60 cm)
Length ......................
Type ..........................
Shepard’s Hook
Backglass Wiper Blade
Length .....................
16 inches (40.6 cm)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shepard’s Hook
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If
you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
6-67
b
NOTES
b
6-68
kh NOTES
6-69
b
6-70
NOTES
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
7 -4
7-29
7-33
7-34
7-36
Selecting the Right Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C:Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
Introlduction
IMPORTANT-
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE A:
RECOMMENDED
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your
Pontiac dealer for details.
7-2
Your'Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels OF the wrong tire inflation can increase thelevel
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into fiveparts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
Performing maintenancework on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you havethe required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the
job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services”
tells
you what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do tohelp keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some recommended products to helpkeep your vehicle
properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or haveit done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
YOU to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in goodworking condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’lldrive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you
may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This past tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recomended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificatioflire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recornended fuel. See “Fuel” in theIndex.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City
Definition
~
~
~~
I
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 krn).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
9
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
0
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasonsyou should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooneK
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 00'0km): Engine Oil andFilter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10
000 km): Chassis Lubrication
(or 6 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Passenger
Compartment AirFilter Replacement.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if drivingin dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Capand Lines
Inspection (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
(Continued)
7-5
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Intervals
I
Long TripNighway Intervals
I
~~
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a filly warned engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down sloweE
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) :Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Every 30,000 Miles (510000 km): Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service '(severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines
Inspection (or every 60 months, whichever occurs fxst).
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km):Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
7-6
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000miles (z40 000 km)
be performed at
the same interval after 150,000miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
shift linkage, parking brake cableguides and the
underbody contact points and linkage.
-
A good tirne to check
brakes is during the
rotation. See“Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’ in Pa& C of this schedule.
+
Footnotes
3- The U.S.Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed atthe indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-7
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichev’eroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
MILEAGE
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
CI Lubricate chassis components (or every 6,months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
9,000 Miles (15000 km)
171
MILEAGE
DATE
I
DATE
I
Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassk
ponents (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote if.)
7-8
MILEAGE
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
DATE
1
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper
rotation pattern and ad’ditional information.
(See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
7-9
1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months,whicheveroccursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7
a
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 600 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
13Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
Art Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-10
!
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
1
~
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
CI Rotate tires. See“Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I DATE
I
SERVICED BY:
I
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(7 Change engine oil and filter
7-11
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
I DATE
01 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, Whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
Art Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-12
I
MILEAGE
I
I
I DATE
MILEAGE
I
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32”C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
r y o u do not use your vehicle underany of these conditions,the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
MILEAGE
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
El Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
( S e e footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
I
I
I
7-13
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
~
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
SERVICED BY:
60,000 MiZes (100 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Sewice.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote-f-.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-14
SERVICED BY:
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
~~
~
~~
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
DATE
1
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in theIndex for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I
I
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
~
~~~~
72,000 Miles (I20 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
7-15
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
72,000 Miles (I20 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
!J Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
1
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst)
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-16
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
I DATE
I
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (I45 000 km)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
~~
I
~~
DATE
SERVICED BY:
1
Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-17
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
DATE
Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or ‘every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote a.)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
MILEAGE
I DATE
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever OCCUFS first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-18
MILEAGE
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
7-19
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-20
I DATE
I LongTrip/HighwayMaintenanceSchedule I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after100,000miles
(166 000 lux) at the sameintervals. The services shown
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
7 The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air ResourcesBoard has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty orlimit recall liability priorto the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however,
urge that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and the
underbody contact points and linkage.
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
ACTUAL
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
I
SERVICED BY:
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service,
[Ti Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-22
ACTUAL
SERVICED BY:
I LongTripmighwayMaintenance
Schedule
I
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
izI Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation patternand additional information. (See footnote +.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
Cl Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I
MILEAGE
I
I
I
I DATE
I
SERVICED BY:
7-23
Long: Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
El Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
7-24
DATE
MILEAGE
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
DATE
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first),
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
MILEAGE
Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
E
l Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any darnage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
7-25
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
Whichever
occurs
first).
(See footnote #.>
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
MILEAGE
I
I
I
75,000Miles (125 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
I3 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
El Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
MILEAGE
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
7-26
-MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
DATE
Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
MILEAGE
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index forproper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
I
DATE
I
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
a
7-27
1.Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
61 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32”C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
,Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever OCCUFS first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap
An Emission Control Sewice.
DATE
MILEAGE
I
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once,
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Least Oncea Month
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
per$orm these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See “Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Check the engine oil level and add theproper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
7-29
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint Sysgem Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly.If your vehicle has a built-in child
restraint, also periodically make sure.the harness straps,
latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint
system parts. If you see anything that might keep a
safety b’eltor built-in child restraint system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts or harness straps replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not needregular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
‘7-30
Automatic Transaxle Check
if needed. See
Check the transaxle fluid level; add
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. A fluid loss m y
indicate a problem. Check the
system and repair if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part I).
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, including the liftgate.
Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for
the hood, power sliding door cable, rear compartment,
glove box door and any folding seat hardware. Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sureyou have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply boththe parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, andbe
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the starter works inany other position, your vehicle
needs service.
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others
could be
injured. Follow thesteps below.
1. Before you start, be sureyou have enoughroom
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) withnormal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK(P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-31
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignitionkey to LOCK in each shift lever position.
0
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
0
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
PARK (P)
Me4anisrn Check
1 /i\
0
CAUTION:’
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could
be damaged. Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce should the vehicle begin
to move.
7-32
I
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
0
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should be
performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring
and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department
or other qualifzed service centerdo these jobs. Make sure
any necessary repairsare completed atonce.
Proper procedures to perfom these services maybe
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
build-up in the floor panor could let exhaust fumes into
the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced
if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Cleanthe outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and
pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, an
damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system
for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear
or lack
of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc,
Clean and then inspect the driveaxle boot seals for
damage, tears or leakage. Replace sealsif necessary.
any components that have high effort or excessive wear.
Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and
Exhaust System Inspection
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes
out-of-position parts as wellas open seams, holes, loose
inspected more often ifyour driving habits or conditions
connections or other conditions which could cause a heat
result in frequent braking.
7-33
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identifieldbelow by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
7-34
FLUIRLUBRICANT
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench’ [email protected]
or [email protected]’
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
~
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power SteeringFluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
[email protected]
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
@
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Windshield
Washer Solvent
~
GM Optikleen' Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
USAGE
Rear Folding
Seat, Fuel Door
Hinge, Liftgate
Hinges, Power
Sliding Door
Cable
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Sliding Door
Track
Lubriplate' Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Hood Latch
[email protected] Aerosol
Assembly,
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
Secondary Latch, equivalent) or lubricant meeting
Pivots, Spring
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
~~
I
FLUIDLUBRICANT
%
I
-
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-P ose Lubricant,
Superlube
% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-35
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduledservices are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to storethem.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
SERVICED BY
7-36
MAINTENANCE PERFOFWED
Maintenance Record
.
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
-..-
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-37
Maintenance Record
7-38
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
.Li=~
-~ .
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
. ':I
. :j,
.____,
__
~.
7-39
Maintenance Record
7-40
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance. This section also tells
you how to obtain service
publications and how to reportany safety defects.
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
Pontiac Cares
What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Pontiac Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
8- 11
warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects tothe United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects tothe
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-11
Ordering Service andOwner Publications
8- 10
8-10
8-11
in Canada
8-1
Pontiac Cares
A
/
' A
With PONTIAC C A N S , you are never more than
a phone call awayfrom having your concern taken
care of.
8-2
The PONTIAC CARES philosophy 'and elements are
designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes
you as a valuable customer, appreciates your pur&ase
decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most
important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A
valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac, afeature
that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you
safety, security, comfort and convenience.
What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km)Bumper to
Bumper Warranty
Customer Assistance
Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
All of these elements combine to make your driving
experience an enjoyable one,and are discussed in
greater detail further in your owner’s manual. Pontiac is
focusing on the changing needs of our customers and
is committed to giving you an exceptional level of
customer care throughout your ownership experience.
Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our
product and our services, and make you the most
satisfied customer in the world.
8-3
Pontiac dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns youmay have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your completesatisfaction, take the
following steps:
For help outside sf the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In h e r t o Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
STEP ONE -- Discuss yourconcern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has
already been reviewed with thesales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-PM-CARES. In Canada, contact
GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in
Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
8-4
0
0
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
8
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
0
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315
In other overs'easlocations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Csrporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-4112.
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Pontiac,
address your inquiry to:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343-6008
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for addressesof GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern wdl likely be resolved in the dealership, using the
deder’s facilities, equipment and personnel. Thatis why we
suggest you follow StepOne first if you have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at itsCustomer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can comunicate with
Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
8-5
Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of u n c e d situations by providing
minor repair information over the phone or
making
arrangements to towyour vehicle to the nearest
Pontiac dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
Fuel delivery
Keys locked in vehicle
0 Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
0 Change a flat tire
Jump starts
0 Courtesy Transportation -- See Pontiac Courtesy
Transportation section for details
3
Security While You Travel
1-800-ROADSIEE(1-800-762-3743)
As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
8-6
We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the
following additional services depending on your needs:
0
0
0
0
0
0
Hotels
Glass replacement
Tire repair facilities
Rental vehicle or taxis
Airports or train stations
Police, fire department or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
providethefollowing infomation to give the advisor:
0
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac’s
judgement theclaims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
While we hope that you never havethe occasion to use
our service,it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only
a phone call
away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance-- 1-800-ROADSIDD
or 1-800-762-3743.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have anextensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
0
0
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number
8-7
Pontiac Courtesy Transportation
Pontiac strives to give you a worry-free ownership of
your vehicle, and we realize the inconvenience of being
without a car. So Pontiac has come up with a way to
eliminate any frustrations you might have when trying
to get a ride to work, or wondering how you will get
home. Well, your worries are over. Pontiac provides
no-cost transportation when you bring your
1998 Pontiac in for warranty service.
8-8
It applies to any repair covered under the
3 year/36,000 mile (601 000 km)limited warranty, and to
any 1998 Pontiac requiring repair as a result of product
recall or special policy situations. For same day service,
you are entitled to one-way shuttle service of up to
10 miles (16 km). If the vehcle requires multiple day
repairs, you’re entitled to either a Pontiac loaner or
reimbursement for a rental car, up to $30/day, for up
to five days.
Some state insurance regulations makle it impractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Pontiac
will reimburse you, up to $30/day, for any documented
transportation you receive.
In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation,
GM Participation inan Alternative
Dispute ResolutionProgram
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are committed to
making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure described earlier in this section is
very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Pontiac voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint servingas an intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hexing will
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decis'ion which you may
accept orreject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made,
Some state laws may require you to use t h i s program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in thecourts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Pontiac Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-PM-CARES.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separatewarranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFE(TU THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould
cause acrash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in additionto
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar c80mplaints,it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other informationabout motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, inaddition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited.You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K l G 3J2
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1- 800-PM-CARES or write:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343-6008
8-11
1998 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering
the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 PONTIAC
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written
directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner's manual will includethe Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
Phis manual provides informationon unit repair service
procedures, adjustmentsand specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer
cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includesa Portfolio, Owner's Manualand
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletinsgive technical servi'ce informationneeded
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
Without Portfolio:Owner's Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications areavailable for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356.Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
GM-PON-ORD98 *(Prices
are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Allow
ample
time
for delivery.)
are
make
to checks
payable
in
Sh
Note to Canadian Customers:All listed prices are quoted in U S . funds. Canadian residents
U.S.funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U S . order processing.
$&
I
8-14
NOTES
Section 9 Index
Accessory Inflator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
2-80
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Equipment to theOutside Of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
Adjusting the Bucket Seats .......................
1-26
1-19
Adjusting the Split Bench Seat ....................
1-48
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-53
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-51
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-51
1-50. 2-87
Readiness Light .........................
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-56
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
What Makes it Inflate ..........................
1-53
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
When Should it Inflate .........................
1-52
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-67
Air Filter Replacement, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . 6-16
2-78
AirInflator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alignment and Balance, Tire ......................
6-46
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Antenna, Integrated Windshield ....................
3-33
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 1
Anti-Lock
4-7
Brakes ......................................
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89, 4-7
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Appearance Care Materials .......................
6-56
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-77
Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control . . . . . . . 3-30
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Automatic Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
7-30
Automatic Transaxle Check .......................
6-18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ........................
HOWto Add .................................
6-21
Howtocheck ...............................
6-19
When to Checkandchange .....................
6-18
Automatic Transaxle Operation ....................
2-30
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
Automatic Transaxle Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3. 5.5
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-64
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
4-22
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,.4-27
9-1
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38.4-28. 4-36
Brake
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Adjustment
6-29
Cassette Deck Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11. 7-29
3-15
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
6-27
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-15. 3-18
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34CD Adapter Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
System Warning Light ....................
2-88, 6-28
Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
4-29
Certificatioflire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Transaxle Shift Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Chains. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 1
...................................
Tire
Chains.
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Wear.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Brakes,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Checlung Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100
Braking
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
BTSI
................................
1-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restraints
Child
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
BTSICheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-31
Built-in
Cleaning Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Bucketseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position
(Bucket Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
1-92
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 1
(Third Row Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-80
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications ......................
6-66
WheretoPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-84
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-59
Captain’s
Removing ,............,..................... l-31
6-15
Cleaner.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
9-2
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . .
. . 6-53
Built-in Child Restraint . . . . .
*.
. . 6-50
. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
Inside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Outside of Your Vehicle . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Cleaning, Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-9
Clock, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coinholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-69
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
3-19, 3-21
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33
3-20, 3-22
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Compact Overhead Console ......................
2-66
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
4-6
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
2-73
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
6-24
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Heater. Engine . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
5-17
RecoveryTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
What to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-69
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Damage, Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damage, Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defogger, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delayed Illumination ............................
Dimensions, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Information Center ........................
6-54
6-54
2-59
5-3
8-10
4-2
3-5
3-4
3-4
2-61
6-67
2-63
2-97
2-4
2-15
2-14
2-99
9-3
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Four-Way Manual Seat ....................
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-39
1-2
4-20
4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 17
Night ......................................
4-16
4-11
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
On Snow and Ice .............................
4-26
Throughwater ...............................
4-19
4-17
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
Dump and Stow Feature ...........................
1-7
Electrical Equipment. Adding ....................
2-28
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Electronic Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Coolant Heater ...............................
2-29
Coolant Level Check ..........................
7-29
2-92
Coolant Temperature Gage .....................
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Exhaust .....................................
2-38
5-57
Identification ................................
9-4
OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Running Whileparked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
StartingYour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2-96, 6-11
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
What Mind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
When to Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Equipment, Adding to the Outside Of Your Vehicle . . . . . 6-3
Exhaust, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
Fabric Cleadng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Fan Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Tank ........................
6-7
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Filter. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Filter, Passenger Compartment Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
FirstGear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Flashers, Hazard Warning .........................
5-2
Flat Tire, Changing .............................
5-23
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-34
F o g L ~ p s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Folding Driver’s Seatback .........................
1-3
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . .
. . . 6-5..
. . . . . 11
French Language Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrontDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Front Parkingmrn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-34
Front Seat Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-70
Front Seat Storage Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
.................... 6-3
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuses and circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 2-92
F d ........................................
2-98
2-85
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-86
Garage Door Opener Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Gear Positions, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
ii
Guide en FranCais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .4-29
,
Halogen
6-31
" Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
1-6
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps . . . . . . . . .
. . . 2-58
Bulb Replacement . . . . . .
. . . . . 6-31
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
3-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 2-53
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
Hood
6-8
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
H o .~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
4-19
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
2-78
Inflator.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Inspections
7-33
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-33
Exhaust Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Radiator and Heater Hose ......................
7-33
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-33
7-33
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
9-5
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
6-50
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Light Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Instrument Panel Switchbank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 14
.................................
Interior
2-60
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
Jack.
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 5-26
. . . . 5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-30
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resynchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 13
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .Traction
. . . 2-2
2-96
Labels
CertificationlTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-57
Tire-LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Lamps
2-6 1
Delayed Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
ExitLighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Illuminated Entry ............................. 2-62
9-6
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
RearCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-36
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50.2.87
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89. 4.1
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88. 6.28
Charging System Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Boor Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Engine TemperatureWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
_ _ ~
Low Coolant Warning ....................
2-93. 6-24
2-98
2-9 LowFuelWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96, 6-11
............................
Low
4-9
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Safety Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34. 2-87
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Traction Control System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90, 4-10
Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cylinders
7-30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Ignition Transaxle Che'ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-32
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-30
Last Door Closed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Lockout Beterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
~
Power
Door
.................
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 15
Sliding Door Child Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Sliding Door Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-40
Locks and Lighting Choices ......................
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 15
Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93.6.24
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2.96.6.11
Low Oil Level Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.91.4.9
Low Traction Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-34
7-30
Lubrication Service. Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-73
Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
LumbarControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
MaintenanceRecord ............................
7-36
7- 1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How This Section is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Long TripMighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Long TripMighway Intervals .....................
7-6
7-29
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-5
Short Trip/City Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ........................
Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
2-93
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
Matching Transmitters to Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.................... 2-64
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Illuminated Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
2-64
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
2-64
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-77
VisorVanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode Buttons, Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Mode Knob, Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
4-23
Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N e t , Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
2-31
2-25
4-16
Odometer . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 2-85
Odometer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-85
4-13
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-96, 6-11
2-96
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
Driver Information Center ......................
2-99
Garage Door Opener Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Switchbank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Overheated Engine Protection .....................
5-12
5-12
Overheating Engine .............................
Owner Checks and Services .......................
7-29
Owner Publications. Ordering .....................
8-12
9-7
P a i n t Spotting.Chemical ...
..................
Park
Automatic Transaxle ..........................
Shifting Into .................................
Shifting Out of ...............................
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
2-30
2-35
2-37
2-23
2-34
7-32
Brake Mechanism Check .......................
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-38
Over Things That Burn ........................
WithaTrailer ................................ 4-39
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . 6-16
1-48
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
PontiacCares ...................................
8-2
Power
2-80
Accessory Outlet .............................
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
OptionFuses ................................
6-58
2-51
Rear Quarter Windows .........................
Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Seat ................................,........ l-3
Sliding Door Light ............................
2-97
Steering ....................................
4-11
Sunroof .....................................
2-81
Windows ...................................
2-50
Bower Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2 5
Howtocheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6-25
WhattoWse .................................
Whentocheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Brake ......................................
9-8
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ....................
1-47
5-1
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
Radiator Pressure Cap ...........................
6-24
3-31
Radio Reception ................................
Radios .......................................
3-10
Rain. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
Rear ..............................
. . 2-63
Rear
AirVents ..........................
. . . . . .3-8
CagoLmp .................................
2-63
Climate Control ...............................
3-6
Comfort Controls ..............................
3-7
3-6
Fancontrol ..................................
Outside Seat Position ..........................
1-56
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
1-60
SeatAudio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Seatpassengers ..............................
1-56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
Towing .....................................
5-11
Window Defogger .............................
3-5
WindshieldWasher ...........................
2-55
Rearview Mirror. Inside Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ....................
6-67
Remote. Compact Disc Player .....................
3-26
Remote Operation of the Power Sliding Door ......... 2-10
Removing
. . . 1-26
Bucket Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second
Row
Solid Bench Seat . . . .
. . . . 1-8
. . . . 1-20
Split Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
Third Row Solid Bench Seat . .
. 1-14
Replacement
. . . . 6-66
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 6-67
. . . . . . 6-46
Wheel . . . . . . . .
Replacing
Bucket Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-101
Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash . . . . . 1-101
Second Row Solid Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Split Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
1- 15
Third Row Solid Bench Seat ....................
Reporting Safety Defects ....................
8-10, 8-11
Resetting the Power Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Restraint System. Supplemental (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Restraints
1-100
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-80
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 1-34, 2-87
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 101
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-30
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
1-48
8-6
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Roadside Assistance, Canadian .....................
Rocking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Saddlebag . . . . . . . .
. . 2-71
Safety Belt Extender . .
..
. . . 1-100
Belts
Safety
...........
.......
. . . . 1-33
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-39
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-66
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-100
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-39
Incorrect Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42, 1-98, 1-99
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 1-62, 1-64
Lap-Shoulder . . . .
. . . . . . . 1-39, 1-57
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-97
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Questions and Answers ........................
1-38
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-60
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-56
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-101
Right FrontPassenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-47
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-35
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
...
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10, 8-11
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
7-4
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2, 1-6
Seatback
Folding Driver’s . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4
Reclining Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
Seats
1-6
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Four-Way Manual ......................
1-2
Dump and Stow Feature .........................
1-7
Lumbar Control ...............................
1-6
Manual Front Passenger .........................
1-4
Power .......................................
1-3
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1
SeatControls .............................
1-2, 1-6
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Securing a Child Restraint ......................
1-87
SecondGe ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Second Row Solid Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Folding the Seatback ...........................
1-8
Removing .................................... l-8
Replacing ...................................
1- 10
Securing Child Restraints
Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90, 1-92
Rear Outside Seat Position ......................
1-87
Right Front Seat Position .......................
1-94
Service ........................................
6-2
Bulletins, Ordering ............................
8-12
EngineSoonLight ............................
2-93
Manuals, Ordering ............................
8-12
Parts Identification Label .......................
6-57
Publications, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
6-2
Work, Doing Your Own .........................
Service and Appearance Care ......................
6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-54
9-10
Shifting
AutomaticTransaxle ..........................
2-30
IntoPARK(P) ...............................
2-35
2-37
Out of PARK (P) .............................
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .....................
1-41
Side Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-77
2-73
Side Convenience Net ...........................
2-53
Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
1-66
Smaller Children and Babies ......................
3-31
Sound Equipment, Adding ........................
Spare Tire, Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Specifications and Capacities ......................
6-66
6-66
Specifications, Engine ...........................
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Speedometer ...................................
2-85
Split Bench Seat .................................
1-18
Adjusting ...................................
1-19
Folding or Reclining the Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-18
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Replacing ...................................
1-22
Stains, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Starter Switch Check ............................
7-31
Starting Your Engine ............................
2-27
Steam ........................................
5-13
Steering ......................................
4-11
4-12
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips ........................................
4-11
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Steering Wheel Touch Controls ....................
3-30
StorageBin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
01-p '06-2
* *
* *
.'
[email protected]?
8UrUJEM UI3)SdS 1O.IlUO3 UOFJSRIJ,
..........................
[OauoJ Uo~J3e.Q
6-t7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UaJsdS
.
1-s ................................a p p p mo;r,
~
~U~MOJ,
Z€-P
99-9'os-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I3FEJJ, B %.ITMOLL
InN
p
a q 'anbloJ
~
l E - z . . . . . * . . . , ,........................
q 3 q anblo;L
E 8 - ~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dmls do&
.......................
JQ3 a~!J, S,lI lUayM
9€9-9
p - 9 . " . . ' . . . , ' ' . . ' . . " . . . . . . ' MgN)uwxmqdax
aam
..............................
€9-9 ......................
Sl0)EXpUI
1TtaM
LP-9
~ u a m x ~ pay&
d q pasn
.......................
sp-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .;3urpt?sa
w-9
ux.IO3~un
. . . . . . .IllgEnb
..
JErtMpK9iJ
sp-9"" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UOpLIJ,
s p ~ 9 . ' . ' . ' ' . . . . . . . . . . ' ' ' . ' ' . . ' . . ' ' ' ' amnyaadrrrq,
'
.........................
I€-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .amds
. . . . .10
. . .~ q Bd3rrpo~s
TP-9
amssa&J
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
............................
6Z-$7
%.I-Fp?2oq
zp""''.
.................
ucxpqo~
p u uogmdsq
~
6 z - L " . . . . .......................
* '
y3ay3 aoypgu1
~ p - 9 . . . . ' . . ' . . . , . . ' , ' . . . . . ' ' . . . ' . . . ' ' ' ' uo!2q.JUI
.
zE-" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
a=ds
p
edmq
ps-9""" ..............................
Bupa13
E Z - S ' ' ' . . . ' ' ' . . . . . ' ' ' . ' . . . . ' . . . . . . p?idE [email protected]
Lp".. ...................................
SZIF~'y3
..................... M ~ Suphg
N
EP~9...."".."
"'.'"""'..''''
~~~~"~~~~
a3mpa p m luauIu%yv
o P - 9 " " . . . . . . . . .............................
sal!,
6 z - p " . . " ' . . . . . . . . . ' . ' pqTq UopUTIopI 3u~peo~-aJ!,
6 z ~ t 7 . . . . . . . . " ' . . . ' . . . . " ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8uFpaoT 9.II&L
.........................
S U P Y 3 aJ?L
61.b-9"'"""
-E,... ............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3418 u q q ' 3 q L
zs2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. . ~ %WaalS
M
WL
S1-T
Bu131qdq
...................................
PI-1
ZT-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
%I~AOTIHX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .y=qvas
. . . . . aql %uploit
€1-1
3qsnrpv
......................
21-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .w. g. .s .P. .U. W
. . PrPS
. . . . M o l l P"UA
Z€-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wa9 P%L
1ElsoUIJayJ
Lsz-9
z - s . " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X3OTUEIHJ
L Z - E . . . ' . . ' . . . . ' ' ' * * mhqd
a3 'ampad ~ m u 3 p ( - ~ - 3 3 a q ~ ,
zz-z"..'."'+ " " . . ' " " . . ' " * * ' ' . ' . . ' ' . . ' . .
333u
. . . . . . . . . . . rUa)SXS l O . Q U 0 3 a)t?rug3'q0u)I aJwE.Iadura&
...............................
ZE-E
d E T d dEJ,
'E-9"
..................... ~uauracqdaxqpa
dm[pt?L
..................................
LL
98-2
~
l3laUIOLp.e
.
~
~
. . . .~. . . . al3FYaA
" 'S[OqUJ&
~
~
~T~Z....''''.'.'..'''''.'.''........'''
syut?qyayMg
....................
wa~sds
l
u
y
~
s
a
a
pwmwqddns
T8-Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300mn~
89".."'.''".'
. . " ' . pauqmdum3 a3mols sassq2ung
LL-z.' ..................................
SLOSTA uns
*
~ ~ - s , , ' ' ' . . ' . . . . . . . 'MOUS
..
.IO 331 'prim 'PUES UI :y3WS
~F"..."
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ax^ a n d s .to ~ q ad3uvols
O E - 9 " ' . . . ' .........................
3[3lriar\ 'a8'€?.IOlpl
.............................
WOJd
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sassq8unS
TL-z"'..'
89-z.""..'.""""'
s 9 ~ z ' ' ' ' ' ' ' . ' ' . . . ' ' . ' ' ' ' ' ' ' . . spxxqredruo3
..
~ZEJOJS
9 z - s................ .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . laayM'y3uaJfi
~ . . . .g. . . . . .-.
Sz-p..""........'
. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .drur?lp€?aH
..
A!
'8U!JFM
8s-9
8 u p q a J ~ ~ U I M 9-+,
8S-9....'.......'..............'..'.......
sasnd
6 ~ - 9 ' . ' . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . luauraqdaa apqg
ss-z........................*..............nax
PS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
............
. . . . . . . . . .JadFM
. . . . .Pla!YsPu!M
..
S. S. .- 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nax
* *
PFld
9z-9bps- z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VaY3
. . . . . .P. .a. .7 PFld
p s - z.................................
........"".................
T
T s-2
S-Z....'......................
- W S E M PP!VPU!M
S q W ? 3pT.s
Ja$IEn() JEaa l3MOd
SMOPUIM
DMOd
o s - z.....................................
..............*....".................
OS-Z
9 z - S............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . y3Ua.IM
LV-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ). u. m a x l d q pasn
9p-9
99-9'o€-s ............................. luawaxldax
anbJoL
InN
......................................
~uaruu8!~v
payM
sdplsJaylEaM
......................................
2s-9...'...
.Pp~YspuTM
. . a-131.qaA'pInldzaFySvM
. . . . . . . . . ................. .. .. .. .. . . .JnoA
JaysEM
92-9
9
8 - z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SJOlE3!pUI
PUG
Sa%t?f)'Sly8Fq 8UrU.IEM
z-s...'..........'..........,....'
nn
saqAaa B u p n
L LL--zz.". .' . . . ."..................' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' unsbslosyA
.................................
sdTLuollelFluaA
6%
8 - E . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . , ' . . . uIalsAS uoTIElrluaA
S.IO.I.I!m&!UEAJOS!A
. . . . . ....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aBwolS
6z-p
8uypT?o+-I
L s - 9 . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JaquInN uoymgguap~
..........
g . . . .~. . . . . .~. .
21-6
~ suo!suauna
~
~
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S.~. U. .~.I J E Ma8eruea
lOJlU03
alWA
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dum? pooqnpun
s€9-9
S - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~. .a .l .u.a. hqax
3.
PUR
pooqlapun
asnd
a ~ u ~ u a l u pLpoqlapun
m
z ~ - L . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . a3p~1aag
Bugsnld LpoqJapu
............
n
8€-P
J ~ ~ BJ ~U!MOLZ,
J
uayhn spu8!s wn,c
z s - z . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;ra~aqu o g ~ u n ~ p l n ~w~ruu %
ss-2
~ s - z. ............................ . . . ' . . . a m y 3 lapupma pu%srunL
s ~ v u t a !a~8 u ~ y 3
a u q PUB pu%s wnL
s - 8 ..................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . sJasR ALL
S8-2
mprrropo d9;C
~ o ~ - z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Jalndmo3
.
dpL
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .' .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .LJJUX
Asapno3 'uopvodsuolL
8
z
.
.
ssapkq bsJall~rusuEJL
8 T - 9.....................................
. . . . . ' . . * ' . ' . . . . ' . . . . . . 3g-errroq7'pFnl6 a l x c s u c ~ ~
.................................
[email protected]
m u
[email protected]%S
8s-p
zE-p
ZUIMOLZ,
SE-P * * * ' ' * ' *
*
'
' * SaJ!,L UO [email protected]!aM @lo&
p E - p . . . . ' . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . ' . ' . . . . . . . . l y 8 p an8uoL
~
9s-p ................................
h33w
suwy3
UO 8u?Pd
6 € -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SllFH
8UTMO;L U a m a3U€?UalU!Elly
Op-p " . " " " " " ' . " " "
.....................................
sE-p
SaWIlH
WM WApa
LE-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
................................
sapel3 uo 2uTApa
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S33p.Ig
Jap€?lL
*
*
*
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement